JP6260725B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like .

Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine or the like that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

In such pachinko machines and the like , a gaming machine has been proposed in which a notice effect relating to a game is executed by a player.

JP 2010-279560 A

In this type of pachinko machine and the like , there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest in gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable Rukoto improves interest in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a discrimination means for executing discrimination and a display means for displaying identification information composed of a plurality of symbol strings for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means. If its after the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit, a display control unit for stopping displaying the identification information at the stop display mode for indicating the discrimination result by said discrimination means, said display control When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result by means, a privilege game is given, which is the specific determination result The stop display mode for indicating that the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed in a specific symbol combination, and the display control means includes at least two symbol sequences of the plurality of symbol sequences. The game machine is configured to be capable of being displayed in a reach display mode in which a combination of symbols that is a part of the combination for indicating the specific determination result is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the gaming machine is controlled by the display control unit. Auxiliary information display means for displaying the auxiliary information related to the discrimination result on the display means separately from the identification information, between the dynamic display of the identification information and the display in the reach display mode, Suggestion information display means for displaying on the display means a plurality of suggestion information for adding a suggestion mode capable of suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the auxiliary information displayed by the auxiliary information display means, and the suggestion information display An auxiliary display mode in which a suggestion mode corresponding to one suggestion information is added to the auxiliary information and displayed among the plurality of suggestion information displayed by the means. The plurality of suggestion information that can be displayed by the suggestion information display means includes first suggestion information and the auxiliary information when the specific determination result is more than the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information that is easily displayed in addition is set, and the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are configured in different display modes.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a discriminating unit for executing discrimination, a display unit for displaying identification information composed of a plurality of symbol strings for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and the display unit wherein after dynamically displaying identification information, a display control unit for stopping displaying the identification information at the stop display mode for indicating the discrimination result by said discrimination means, by said display control means, said determination When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for indicating that the result is a specific determination result, a privilege game is given and for indicating the specific determination result The stop display mode is such that the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed in a combination of specific symbols, and the display control means selects at least two or more symbol sequences among the plurality of symbol sequences as the specific determination. Result The game machine is configured to be able to display in a reach display mode in which the display is stopped or temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that is a part of the combination for indicating the display, and in the gaming machine, the identification information is moved by the display control means. By the auxiliary information display means for displaying the auxiliary information related to the discrimination result on the display means separately from the identification information, from the initial display to the display in the reach display mode, and the auxiliary information display means Suggestion information display means for displaying a plurality of suggestion information on the display means for adding a suggestion mode capable of suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the displayed auxiliary information, and the suggestion information display means Auxiliary display mode control means for displaying a suggestion mode corresponding to one of the plurality of suggestion information in addition to the auxiliary information for display. The plurality of suggestion information that can be displayed by the suggestion information display unit includes first suggestion information and second information that is more easily displayed in addition to the auxiliary information when the specific determination result is more than the first suggestion information. Suggestion information is set at least, and the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are configured in different display modes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display, so that various display modes can be displayed. There is.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A)-(i) is the figure which showed the kind of 3rd symbol. (A) is the figure which showed typically the effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the state by which the left and right symbols in the conversation notice variation pattern were stopped and displayed, and (b) was the figure which showed an example of the display mode when conversation is established in the conversation notice. (C) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a conversation notice effect. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of a conversation notice effect, (b) is the figure which showed the reach display aspect after the conversation notice effect in a conversation notice variation pattern, (c), It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the conversation in a conversation notice becomes unsuccessful. It is the block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the content of ROM of MPU of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the conversation notice selection table of character ROM of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the conversation notice data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a display conversation notice process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, and (b) shows a conversation notice dedicated stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the shown flowchart. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a time chart when the conversation of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is established, and (b) is a case in which the conversation of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. (A) is the figure which showed the display mode of the state in which the change before the fluctuation | variation by which the fluctuation | variation of the conversation notice variation pattern of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment was performed was stopped, (b) is 2nd implementation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the conversation by the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in a form is materialized, (c) becomes the conversation by the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment unsatisfied. (D) is a diagram showing a reduced display area displayed on the third symbol display device when the conversation notice of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display conversation dummy notice process performed. (A) is a time chart when the conversation of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment is established, and (b) is a case in which the conversation of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment is not established. It is a time chart. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart in case the conversation of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment is materialized. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the conversation announcement effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 1 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the display effect selection table 2 of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice data table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display conversation notice process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 3 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display effect selection table 4 of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display conversation notice process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment, (c) is a frame button in the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode which alert | reports so that a person may press. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which alert | reports to a player that the conversation notice production effect of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment is performed, (b) is the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect which alert | reports to a player that a conversation notice effect of this is not performed, (c) is a display aspect when the conversation of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment is not materialized It is the figure which showed an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button press effect process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment, (c) is the display aspect of the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is the time chart which showed the case where the conversation in the conversation preview of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment is materialized, (b) is the conversation in the conversation preview of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment not established. It is the time chart which showed the case. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (disconnection) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice pattern table (win) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation notice production data table (10 second) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment, (b) is the conversation notice of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the production data table (8 seconds). It is the figure which showed typically an example of the conversation announcement effect data patable (5 second) of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button press effect process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the ball, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  Both “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B” will be in a special gaming state with 16 rounds (16R jackpot). After that, if the jackpot value is “Big Jack A”, Until that time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of special symbol (during special symbol change). On the other hand, in the case of “big hit B”, the normal symbol is in a short time state from the end of the big hit until the lottery is executed 100 times (until the change of the special symbol is started).

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common, and depending on the type of jackpot, the “short time of normal symbols” The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Also, for example, instead of changing the period when the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory in the hit of a normal symbol. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated in detail with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.5. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A to 4I, a symbol which is a kind of pattern is composed of nine types of main symbols to which numbers “1” to “9” are respectively attached. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen (display region) of the third symbol display device 81 has three symbol rows Z1 set side by side as display regions. In the symbol row Z1, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each scroll-displayed in the vertical direction in ascending order. A combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1 is configured to notify the player of a big hit of a game (a big hit game is started).

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the display screen is configured to stop and display three symbols in the symbol row Z1. In the present embodiment, the effective line is only the symbol row Z1, but a plurality of effective lines (for example, three horizontal effective lines and two diagonal effective lines) are set on the display screen. May be.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “probable variation”, and if a big hit A which is 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the same symbol The combination of probability variation symbols is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “normal symbols”. When a big hit B, which is a 16R normal big hit, occurs, the combination of the same normal symbols is Stopped display.

  It should be noted that the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable symbol display in the symbol columns, The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About pre-reading production>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, various information (whether or not, stop type) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64 and various counters have been acquired with respect to the reserved ball of the special symbol. , Variation pattern) is determined (prefetched) in advance. When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command (a jackpot winning command or a winning winning command) including various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect. In addition, about the detail of a prefetch effect, the detail for mentioning later is abbreviate | omitted.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, as shown in FIG. 11, there are a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a regular symbol random number table 202c, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d, and a disconnect variation pattern table 202e. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the above is given as an example of the data table set in the ROM 202, but other data tables, programs, and the like are also stored. The various data tables described above will be described in detail when the following various counters are described.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 11) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the big hit random number. When it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. The jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and a high probability (a special symbol of the special symbol) that has a high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period is a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the jackpot random number table 202a for the special symbol with a high probability and the jackpot random number table 202a for the special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. It is stored in the table 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Stored. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for low probability and the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability are: Random numbers that are big hits are set to avoid duplicate values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Note that the random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the jackpot type table 202b, and this table is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern tables 202d and 202e storing random number values for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the variation pattern table, a big hit variation pattern table 202d and a deviation variation pattern table 202e (see FIG. 11) are set. For example, in the variation pattern table 202e for detachment, “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach” are defined. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d for jackpot A and jackpot B, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined. Here, an off-conversation notice change pattern is set as one of the off-change patterns. In addition, as one of the various types of “shared super reach”, a conversation notice variation pattern is set. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  FIGS. 6A to 6C and FIGS. 7A to 7B are diagrams schematically showing an example of a missed conversation notice variation pattern or a hit conversation notice variation pattern. After the change of the 3rd symbol is started on the 3rd symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), the 3rd symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, and the middle symbol is displayed at high speed. Or it will be in the state which fluctuates at low speed. As shown in FIG. 6A, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped in a non-reach state) with different symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment is displayed by a balloon (comment window) from a character of the third symbol (in this embodiment, a turtle character) stopped on the left symbol. After that, a conversation comment for the left symbol comment is displayed by a balloon from the third symbol character (in this embodiment, a dolphin character) stopped in the right symbol. As described above, in the out-of-context notice fluctuation pattern or the hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the notice display for performing conversation using the symbols temporarily stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol is executed. When the content of the conversation is established as shown in FIG. 6 (b), an advance notice of whether or not to reach is executed as shown in FIG. 6 (c). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6B, in response to a comment that the left symbol character is “Let's compete?”, The right symbol character is a comment that establishes a conversation “OK!”. As a result, the conversation has been established.

  When the conversation is not established, as shown in FIG. 7C, “...” is displayed in which the right symbol character does not respond to the conversation of the left symbol character. Further, in the present embodiment, it is shown that the conversation is not established because the right symbol character does not answer anything. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right symbol character makes a comment “Yada!”. Corresponds to the fact that the conversation was not established. Further, the present invention is not limited to the content described in the present embodiment, and it is only necessary to show that the conversation is not established when the content of the conversation between the left symbol and the right symbol does not match.

  When the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 6C, a display mode is displayed in which the character “turtle” with the left symbol and the character “shark” with the right symbol compete toward the goal. When the left symbol character “turtle” reaches the goal before the right symbol character “shark” as shown in FIG. 7A, the left symbol and right symbol as shown in FIG. The 3rd symbol of “turtle” is displayed on the screen and the reach state is reached. That is, the conversation notice is a notice display mode for notifying the player whether or not the reach is reached. Thereafter, in the off-conversation notice change pattern or the hit conversation notice change pattern, a predetermined change display mode (dynamic display mode) such as normal reach or super reach is displayed.

  If the content of the conversation is not established, or if the content of the conversation is established but does not reach the reach state due to the subsequent announcement effect, the determined middle symbol stops and the lottery result is out. It will be notified. Thus, the hit conversation notice variation pattern is always configured to reach a reach state. Further, the off conversation notice variation pattern is set both when the reach state is reached and when the reach state is not reached, and is configured to be different depending on the off conversation notice pattern selected by lottery.

  In this way, when the conversation notice is executed, the player can expect that the conversation will be established and become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in the hope that a change in which the conversation notice is executed is started, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal symbol random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the random number table 202c per normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is set in accordance with, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. The random number table 202c per ordinary symbol is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (ordinary symbol) that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the random number table 202c for ordinary symbols for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the normal symbol random number table 202c for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the starting win, the original special symbol is displayed. Apart from the big win lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) corresponding to the start winning prize. The prediction of information is described as prefetching a lottery result of a special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  In addition, the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a also holds the determination result (prefetch determination result) determined in S407 of the start winning process (FIG. 21, S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described later. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 19).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see FIGS. 19, S206, 21, and S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command. In the transliteration form, although not shown, one “●” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one hold.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (Refer to FIG. 23, S704). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 22).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 23, S705). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (FIG. 23, S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203e.

  Specifically, when it is determined that “big hit B”, it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 19). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is completed until the value of the hour / short counter 203e becomes 0 (FIG. 19, S217).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol of the normal symbol based on the random number table 202c for a high probability is used. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random symbol table 202c for the low probability (see FIG. 22, S610, S611).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for storing various other flags and data necessary for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control the pachinko machine 10.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The ROM 222 stores a variation pattern table in which variation patterns are stored, and is determined by the main control device 110 based on variation pattern commands output from the main control device 110 and various winning information commands. The variation pattern can be discriminated.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e, and another memory area 223z are provided. At least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see FIG. 29, S1409). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display controller 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of held balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29, S1402), and when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is set to off (see FIG. 30, S1502). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 29), and when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 30).

  The effect counter 223e is a counter value used for selecting a notice effect or the like. The effect counter 223e is a counter value that is incremented by one and updated every time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed, and is updated from an initial value of 0 to an upper limit value. It is repeatedly updated in the range up to 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value set to 0, which is an initial value, when the power is cut off.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has an other storage area 223z that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Second program storage area 234a1 for storing, character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, conversation notices and conversation notice effects displayed in a conversation notice variation pattern It has at least a conversation notice data table 234a3 which is a data table for display.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1601 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 17) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source last address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image (in this embodiment, (Character being turned on) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if “special symbol jackpot” is displayed, “○” image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” image is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images of “◯” and “×” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 8) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, the third symbol area 235d corresponds to the main symbol consisting of the rear symbols of the various characters shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to (i) as the main symbols not numbered "0" to "9". The image data to be resident is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and notifies the player of the game value (ordinary symbol short time period) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or a special symbol that is reserved This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, the display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses an insertion or the like, and a character that is used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since the display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time (high-speed fluctuation period). While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Conversation notice data table>
Next, the details of the conversation notice selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, in the conversation notice selection table 234a3, among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the types of symbols displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the selected conversation It is determined by determining whether the notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which conversation is established or not. In FIG. 14, the conversation notice selection table 234a3 is shown in a simplified manner. However, when a conversation notice and a conversation are established for each combination of symbols, a subsequent conversation notice effect (FIG. 6 (c) ) And the conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15) for setting the display of FIG.

  The conversation notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and FIG. 7 (a), the conversation notice data table includes a comment display of the conversation notice and a conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 6 (c) and 7 (a). Each is set to an address corresponding to the display timing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the pointer is updated to the address 0064H, the “3 symbols” of the turtle is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row of the 3rd symbol display device 81 (temporary stop display of shaking fluctuation). In addition, display data is set in which a character “Let's compete?” Is displayed together with a balloon from the turtle character. Note that the coordinates of (X, Y) shown in FIG. 15 are simplified illustrations of display position data for displaying the left symbol and comments. Although omitted in FIG. 15, similar display data is set for the subsequent addresses as long as this display mode continues to be displayed. Thereafter, when the pointer is updated to address 008CH, in addition to the above left symbol, the “7 symbol” of the dolphin is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the character “OK!” Is displayed along with the balloon from the dolphin character. Is displayed. Thereafter, as long as this display mode is displayed, similar display data is set in the subsequent addresses.

  Thereafter, as display data transferred when the pointer is updated to address 012CH, display data of a conversation notice effect as shown in FIGS. 6C and 7A is set. In this conversation notice effect, display data displayed by moving characters and the like is set in order at addresses after address 012CH.

  This conversation notice data table is also set in the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and is transferred by a transfer data table described later to generate a drawing list (see FIG. 17). In this conversation notice data table (see FIG. 15), as with the display data table shown in FIG. 13, various data such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are set. In the present embodiment, the description is omitted.

  As described above, since the conversation notice data table for displaying the conversation notice is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the data table of the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the display data table corresponding to the change pattern is displayed. The number can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the conversation notice data table is set separately from the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. You may comprise so that the display content set to a table may also be set.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table and conversation notice data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Among the image data, transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 12).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table and the conversation notice data table, and the final address (see FIG. In the example of FIG. 16, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the characters “Initial setting”, which is a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variation image), on the third symbol display device 81. Flag. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see FIG. 31, S1605). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see FIG. 41 (b), S3405).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 33B and S2101). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see FIG. 33B and S2108) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33 (b), S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42A and S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see FIG. 42 (b), S3302). When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 43) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 17), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 33 (b) ) And S2103), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 17), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 17, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing information includes drawing information set based on the conversation notice data table. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Conversation notice display content, error symbol (not shown) in order of each sprite Detailed information to be described is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side. Thereby, when the drawing content based on the conversation notice data table is set, it can be displayed on the front side from the drawing information set in the display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern.

  With this configuration, even when the conversation notice variation pattern is not displayed, the conversation notice variation table can be shown to the player as if it is another variation pattern by not setting the conversation notice data table. And the number of variation patterns can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the image corresponding to the conversation notice data table is set at the end of the drawing list so that the display mode of the conversation notice is displayed on the forefront side. When an image based on the data table is set, only an image based on the conversation notice data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 33B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3008 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 43). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 43). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 44).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 33B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 44).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. Processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display device performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot type out of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S212). If the jackpot is A, the setting for jackpot A is executed (S213). In the setting for jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). If the jackpot is B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time reductions (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 19) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability changing) (S302). If it is in the high probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot random number table 202a for high probability (S304).

  In the process of S304, a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the big hit random number table 202a for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 random number values stored in the large probability random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the low probability Based on the jackpot random number table 202a, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the big hit random number table 202a for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. It is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S307). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbols such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown). Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by this variation pattern table.

  For example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “displacement”, “normal reach detachment”, “super reach detachment”, “special reach detachment”, and so on are defined. The variation patterns for jackpot A are various types of "probable variation jackpot normal reach", "probability variation jackpot super reach", and "probability variation jackpot special reach". Various types of “normal jackpot super reach” and “normal jackpot special reach” are stipulated.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined from a variation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation pattern of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. (Variation time) is determined.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S308 or S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of jackpot) is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 26). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 18), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for executing a hold process for values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Thereafter, the process of S407 is executed.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the holding ball stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the determination of whether or not is made Perform in advance (pre-judgment judgment of the decision result). In the processing of S407, not only the determination result, but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  If it is determined in the process of S407 that the game is a jackpot (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command as a kind of winning information command is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is super reach, the corresponding jackpot winning command is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that it is out of place (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), an outreach winning command which is a kind of winning information command is set (S409). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern different from the super reach (S409: No), a winning prize command which is a kind of prize information command is set (S411). The winning information command is configured such that the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the variation pattern to be selected. That is, when the conversation notice variation pattern is a selected variation pattern, the variation pattern can be identified.

  Note that the winning information command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when set.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour / short counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the high-probability normal symbol-per-random symbol table 202c, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the probability random number table 202c for normal symbols, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the random symbol table 202c for the low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 10B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process is performed in S912. Migrate to On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If this is the case (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 18) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) or the start winning process (see FIG. 21) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed at 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 20). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-off process in S1318 is performed in this start-up process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 28). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 28), it executes a power-off process in S1318. Before the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is set to ON. After the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is set to OFF. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 28). In other words, since the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 in the state where the power-off flag is set to ON is the current startup process. This is a case where the process is started after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag set to OFF because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, through the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing of S1208 has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1312, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307), the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1316). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1311), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402).

  After S1402 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403), and it is determined whether it is a kind of conversation notice variation pattern (S1405). When it is determined that the conversation notice variation pattern is present (S1404: Yes), a display conversation notice command is set (S1405). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is other than the conversation notice fluctuation pattern (S1404: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1406). When the stop type command is received (S1406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1407), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1408). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1409: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1410). In the process of S1410, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1410 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the process of S1410. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1410 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1409, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1404 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1505: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore this fluctuation display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1506), and then in the process of S1408 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1507).

  In the processing of S1508, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the exact stop type (complete loss, front / rear reach reach, jackpot (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the processing of S1509, it is determined whether the received variation pattern command is a kind of conversation notice variation pattern (S1509). If it is determined that the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern other than the conversation announcement variation pattern (S1509: No), the display control device 114 is notified based on the stop type set in the processing of S1508. A display stop type command is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1511). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1509 that the received variation pattern command is a kind of conversation notice variation pattern (S1509: Yes), a display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1512). The stop type command for exclusive use of the conversation notice for display is a command for instructing the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 to set the display of symbols in the notice of conversation.

  Note that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is based on the contents of the display conversation notice command for display set in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) executed by the MPU 231 of the sound lamp control device 113. Is set. Specifically, the content of the conversation notice is set for each of the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 14, and is predetermined when the process of S1405 is executed. Are determined (by obtaining the value of the effect counter 223e) and the conversation notice change pattern. If the conversation notice variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the conversation notice is established, one of the items in which the conversation notice is established is determined by lottery. If the conversation notice is a variation pattern in which the conversation notice is not established, the conversation notice is not established. Among these, one is determined by lottery. It should be noted that all the hit conversation notice variation patterns are set so that the conversation notice is established. Then, a display conversation notice dedicated stop type command corresponding to the left symbol and right symbol of the set (selected) conversation notice is set.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1702, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 31) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is finished and the boot process is finished.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1702 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. The processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1702.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), The image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 and the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. Are transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1604, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 42A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), a simple command determination process is performed so that a power-on image (a power-on main image or a power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. (Refer to FIG. 33 (b), S2108) and simple display setting processing (refer to FIG. 33 (b), S2109).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is used, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on can be displayed immediately during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S1605, interrupt permission is set (S1606). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When a display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the contents of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In the transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instructions to be transferred. Details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process (S2205), first, a display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is created. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main controller 110. The next variation pattern command for display is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this embodiment, the variation time actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the variable effect having the instruction is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main display device 110 displays the next display pattern. Until the command is received, the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can feel the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the design.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other display data tables Is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, it is easily determined which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303. can do.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f. Is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306).

  Thereafter, the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305, from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and image data of the sprite required in the set display data table is previously stored in the normal video RAM 23 from the character ROM 234. Is transferred to the image storage area 236a as controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, using the time counter 233h in which time data is set in the process of S2304, the time of the variation effect defined in the display data table is counted, and it is determined that the variation effect in the display data table is finished. In this case, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table, The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2105) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2206 that a display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether a display conversation notice command has been received (S2208). If it is determined that the display conversation notice command is received, the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the display conversation notice process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the display conversation notice process (S2209). In the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36A, S2209), a process for setting a notice display mode related to the conversation notice is executed.

  In the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36A, S2209), first, a conversation notice data table corresponding to the display conversation notice command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is selected (determined) from the conversation notice selection table 234a3. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). A transfer data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2503), the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set data table (S2504), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2505), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2208 that the display conversation notice command is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether a display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. (S2210). If it is determined that a display-only conversation notice stop type command has been received (S2210: Yes), a conversation notice-only stop type command process is executed (S2211), and the process of S2201 is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36B, the conversation notice exclusive stop type command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the conversation notice exclusive stop type command processing. This conversation notice dedicated stop type command process (FIG. 36B, S2211) executes a process corresponding to the display conversation notice dedicated variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the conversation notice dedicated stop type command process (FIG. 36 (b), S2211), first, stop type information indicated by the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, A stop type table dedicated to the conversation notice corresponding to any one of the complete departures) is determined (S2601), and after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop type table dedicated to the conversation notice. A stop symbol is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table, as the type information specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table, The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2105) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S2210, when it is determined that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command for display is not received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is an error command (S2212: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing error command processing (S2213). This error command processing (S2213) is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process (FIG. 37, S2213), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2702), and the error command The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S2702. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2213 that there is no error command (S2213: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2219), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), Each process from S2202 to S2219 is executed again. The processing of S2201 to S2219 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 35 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S3001: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on ( S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d or the like, a fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the changing effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. In other words, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the display data table, the variation based on the data table starts. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since then. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3017: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the image of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the processing of S3301, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are not the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process. Therefore, the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is performed. Information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is acquired (S3501). Here, information indicated by the pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the notice transfer data table of the notice data table is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3513). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3513: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and address for storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the conversation notice is set so that the display order is the forefront. Therefore, the display mode of the conversation announcement is on the front side of the symbols and other characters set in the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 6 (b) to 6 (c) and FIG. 7 (a). Is displayed. Furthermore, the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice shown in FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A is established so as to hide the variation of the symbols set in the display data table of the variation pattern. Displayed on the front side. Meanwhile, a temporary third symbol (special symbol) indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing in the lower left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is indicated by two “o”, The player is notified that the change is in progress by alternately turning on and off the “O”.

  In the display data table of the conversation notice variation pattern, the third symbol is set to be variably displayed at low speed or high speed during this period, and when the conversation notice is not displayed, the variation of the symbol is displayed. It has a configuration.

  By configuring in this way, the conversation notice fluctuation pattern can be used as a normal fluctuation pattern even when the conversation notice is not executed. Therefore, the number of fluctuation patterns can be reduced, and the data amount of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the drawing data for the conversation notice is set at the end of the drawing list so that the conversation notice is displayed on the front side of the display content set in the variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when drawing data for conversation notice is set, the drawing data on the back side may not be set in the drawing list.

  Further, the drawing content of the conversation notice in the present embodiment may be set in advance in a display data table corresponding to the conversation notice variation pattern.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to select the conversation notice variation pattern. However, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs rough determination of the variation pattern (for example, determination of only the variation seconds). ), And based on the rough determination of the fluctuation pattern of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114 determines a detailed fluctuation pattern such as a conversation notice fluctuation pattern by lottery or the like. You may comprise as follows. With this configuration, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in order to execute the conversation notice. The symbol has been stopped in a state where it has not yet been displayed. In the present embodiment, the case where the symbol is stopped and displayed without being fluctuated is a case where a predetermined variation time elapses in the variation pattern and the symbol is confirmed and stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol for which the conversation notice is executed is stopped in a symbol (non-reach display mode) that is different between the left symbol and the right symbol. May be. In this case, whether or not a big hit is given by a conversation announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation (a display mode that is easy to be displayed in the case of a big win) when the conversation is established, or after the conversation is established You may comprise so that the effect which alert | reports may be performed.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the display mode of the conversation notice is set based on the selection of the conversation notice variation pattern by the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, whether or not the previous special symbol (the third symbol) is stopped is discriminated and whether or not the conversation notice is executed at the start of the next variation. This is different from the first embodiment in that the determination is performed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<About the conversation notice in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the outline | summary of the conversation notice in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are time charts showing fluctuations when the conversation notice is established and when it is not established.

  FIG. 44A is a time chart showing a case where a conversation notice is established and a conversation notice effect is executed. The variation pattern of variation 1 that has started to be varied earlier is a variation pattern in which the result of the determination is wrong and is stopped with a stop symbol as shown in FIG. In the variation pattern of variation 1, the third symbol is variably displayed at a low speed on the third symbol display device 81. The symbol low-speed variation period: T is passed. After passing through the symbol low-speed fluctuation period again, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), after the three symbols temporarily stop in the symbol row Z1, the symbol temporary suspension period (swing fluctuation period displayed) ) Will be suspended after passing. Thereafter, after a fixed stop for a fixed stop period (1 second in the present embodiment), the change of the special symbol (the third symbol) of change 2 corresponding to the next held hold is started. In this case, it is possible to determine the stop symbol of variation 1 to determine whether or not the conversation can be predicted, and if the symbol can be notified of the conversation, the variation pattern of variation 2 establishes the conversation notification. It is discriminated whether it is a variation pattern that is acceptable (a variation pattern that is set to the establishment of the conversation notice among the hit conversation notice variation pattern or the off-context notice variation pattern), and the conversation notice data table is set.

  Since the fluctuation 2 shown in FIG. 44 (a) is a fluctuation pattern in which the conversation notice is established, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed from the symbol low speed fluctuation period to the symbol high speed fluctuation period. The conversation announcement effect shown in FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A is displayed over the subsequent symbol high-speed fluctuation period and symbol low-speed fluctuation period.

  After that, it is informed that it will be reach, and after the super reach display mode set in the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern of variation 2 is displayed, the symbol is temporarily stopped by a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result After being done, the symbol is temporarily stopped after a symbol temporary stop period.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the conversation notice in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation start timing of fluctuation 2 is reached, the display area of the third symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 45 (b). In the reduced display area 81s, the third symbol is reduced and scrolled from top to bottom as shown in FIG. 45 (d). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variation of the third symbol is being displayed. Further, since the size of the reduced display area 81s is sufficiently smaller than the display area in which the conversation notice is displayed (in this embodiment, about 1/16), the display form of the conversation notice is hindered. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is displayed with the normal character enlargement ratio reduced by the display setting of the display data table. May be set in a dedicated manner so that the symbol is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load required for the reduction process, and to reduce the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area 81s is scrolled from the top to the bottom as in the normal case, but is not limited thereto, and is different from the normal time such as from right to left. It may be configured to display a scroll display or blinking the symbol (increasing or decreasing the luminance of the symbol or changing the transparency of the symbol) to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, by blinking the symbols without scrolling them, it is possible to easily notify that the symbols are changing even in a small display area.

  FIG. 44B is a time chart showing the fluctuation when the conversation notice is not established. The variation 1 is the same as the variation 1 shown in FIG. The time chart shown in FIG. 44 (b) determines the stop pattern of change 1 at the start of the change of change 2, and determines the change pattern of change 2 if it is a stop design that can execute a conversation notice. It is a time chart when it is discriminate | determined that it is a fluctuation pattern in which a preliminary announcement is not materialized. In this case, after the conversation notice shown in FIG. 45 (c) is displayed during the symbol low-speed fluctuation period, the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed set in the display data table of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation 2. Is displayed. Thereafter, after a temporary stop display is performed with a combination of symbols indicating the lottery result, the symbol is temporarily stopped after a symbol temporary stop period.

  By configuring in this way, even if the player has a lottery result fluctuation, if the stop symbol is a combination in which a conversation notice is performed, the conversation notice will be executed and the next change will be a big hit You can play games with the expectation that it might be. Therefore, the player can have an expectation that it becomes a stop symbol that can be notified of the conversation, and can enjoy the game with the expectation of the big hit even if the lottery result is a fluctuation of losing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment. In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, a stop symbol history flag 233m is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag indicating that a stop symbol capable of executing the conversation advance notice is displayed as a previous change. Note that the pre-change indicates a change in the special symbol one time before the start of the change.

  The stop symbol history flag 233m can be used to notify the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the stop type command processing 2 (FIG. 49A, S2215) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is determined to be ON in the processing of S2411. On the other hand, in the processing of S2223 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, it is set to off. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the stop symbol history flag 233m is a flag that is set to OFF.

<Regarding the Control Process Performed by the Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in the Second Embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the variable display setting process (S1312) of the main process (see FIG. 28) is the variable display setting process 2 compared to the first embodiment. (FIG. 47, S1320). About the other process, the process same as the process which MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in 1st Embodiment performs is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1320). In this variable display setting process 2 (S1320), the processes up to S1509 and S1512 are deleted from the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment, and the processes from S1701 to S1713 are The same processes as the processes of S1501 to S1508 and S1511 of the variable display setting process (S1312) in the embodiment are executed.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Embodiment>
In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment, the V interrupt process (FIG. 33B) is different from the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first embodiment. The command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) which is one of the processes is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  With reference to FIG. 48, the command determination process 2 (S2110) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2110). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment, the processes from S2220 to S2222 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and the process of S2207 is performed. Is changed to the process of S2215, and each process from S2208 to S2211 is deleted. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2204 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110), when the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S2220). That is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the previous variation is a stop symbol that can execute the conversation notice. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol that can be notified in conversation is set to a stop symbol other than the reach symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol. However, not limited to this, only a specific stop symbol (for example, a turtle on the left symbol, a shark on the right symbol, etc.) may be set as a symbol that can be used for a conversation announcement. If it is a win when the lottery is executed (when the counter is acquired and the value is a predetermined value), it may be determined as a symbol that can execute the conversation notice.

  If it is determined in the process of S2220 that the stopped symbol history flag 233m is on (S2220: Yes), the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command received this time is a variation pattern that can establish a conversation notice. (S2221). Here, the fluctuation pattern that can establish the conversation notice is a missed conversation notice fluctuation pattern that is set when the hit conversation notice fluctuation pattern and the conversation notice are established. It should be noted that the out-of-context notice fluctuation pattern set when the conversation notice is established is set to a fluctuation pattern that is always reachable. As a result, even if the lottery result is off, the conversation notice is established, so that the player can be sure to show the variation mode of the reach, and the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  If it is determined that the change pattern can establish the conversation notice (S2221: Yes), the display conversation notice process is executed (S2209). Note that the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36 (a), S2209) is almost the same as the process already described in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Corresponding and setting of the conversation notice that the conversation notice is established is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2221 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern that can establish the conversation notice (S2221: No), the display conversation dummy notice process is executed (S2222).

  Here, the display conversation dummy notice process (S2222) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing this display conversation dummy notice process (S2222). In this display conversation dummy notice process (S2222), a process is executed in which display mode data is set in which the content of the conversation notice is not established in the conversation notice of the symbol corresponding to the previously changed stop symbol.

  In the display dummy dummy notice process for display (S2222), first, a conversation dummy notice data table corresponding to the previously changed stop symbol is set (S2311). Note that this conversation dummy notice data table has the same configuration as the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment, and is set such that the conversation notice is not established as shown in FIG.

  A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the processing of S2311 is determined (selected) and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2312). Then, the data table determination flag corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set by the processing of S2311 is turned on, and the data table determination flags corresponding to other conversation dummy notice data tables are set to off (S2313). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2313, it is easy to determine which notice content the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the conversation dummy notice data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2311, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2314), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S2315). Thereafter, the display conversation dummy notice process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the processes of S2209 and S2222 are executed, or when it is determined in the process of S2220 that the stop symbol history flag 233m is off (S2220: No), the process of S2223 is executed.

  In the process of S2223, the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to OFF (S2223). Thereafter, variation pattern command processing is executed (S2205). Since this variation pattern command process (FIG. 35A, S2205) is the same process as already described in the first embodiment, its detailed description is omitted. After the process of S2205 is executed, the process of S2201 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the display stop type command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 ( S2206). If it is determined that the display stop type command has been received (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing 2 is executed (S2215).

  Here, the stop type command process 2 (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the stop type command process 2 (S2215). The stop type command processing 2 (S2215) executed by the MPU 231 on the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is up to S2410 to S2411 with respect to the stop type command processing (FIG. 35B, S2207) in the first embodiment. Each process has been added. In each process from S2401 to S2403, the same process as the stop type command process (FIG. 35B, S2207) of the first embodiment is executed.

  After the process of S2402 is executed, the process of S2410 is executed. In the processing of S2410, it is determined whether or not the combination of stop symbols that are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a combination that allows for a conversation advance notice (S2410). If it is determined that the combination can be notified in advance (S2410: Yes), the stop symbol history flag 233m is set to ON (S2411). On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop symbol is a combination that cannot be notified of conversation (S2410), the processing of S2403 is executed.

  As described above, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not to execute the conversation warning by the next change by determining whether or not the symbol is a stop symbol that can be notified of the conversation. .

  In this way, in the second embodiment, since the conversation notice is executed using the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is out of place. It is possible to make the player expect that a conversation notice will be executed. In addition, when the content of the conversation notice is established, the player can expect the jackpot. Therefore, the player may expect that the content of the conversation notice will be established and become a jackpot across two fluctuations. it can.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the conversation notice is executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in that, at the start of the fluctuation, the next fluctuation is pre-read and if the conversation notice fluctuation pattern is set, the conversation notice setting is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Regarding the Control Process Performed by the Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in the Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 51, the main process (FIG. 28) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

  In the main process (see FIG. 51) in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) is replaced with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420), compared to the main process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1330). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  The command determination process 2 (S1420) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1420). The processes of S1421 to S1423, S1425 to S1430, and S1433 of the command determination process 2 (S1420) in the second embodiment are the same as S1401 to S1403, S1405 to S1410 of the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) of the first embodiment. The same processes as those in S1419 are executed. In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1423 to S1424 and S1431 to S1432 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. ing.

  After the process of S1423 is executed, the process of S1424 is executed. In the processing of S1424, the lottery result of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is out of place, and the variation that starts to be varied next (the variation with respect to the lottery stored in the holding first area) is the conversation. It is determined whether it is a notice variation pattern (S1424). Here, the type of the variation pattern of the variation to be started next is determined based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a based on the winning information command output from the main controller 110. .

  In the processing of S1424, if it is determined that the current variation is out of order and the variation pattern of the next variation is the conversation announcement variation pattern (S1424: Yes), a display conversation announcement command is set (S1425). .

  The display conversation notice command set here is set to a command indicating that the conversation notice indicates the establishment of the conversation notice if the next change conversation notice fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the establishment of the conversation notice. It should be noted that a notice display as shown in FIG. 45B is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by setting a display notice notice command indicating that the conversation notice is established. On the other hand, if the next notice conversation fluctuation pattern is a conversation notice fluctuation pattern in which the conversation notice is not established, a display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice is not established is set. By setting the display conversation notice command indicating that the conversation notice is not established, a notice display as shown in FIG. 45 (c) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are displayed with variation 2 in the second embodiment, but in the third embodiment, they are shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). Thus, the display is displayed from the temporary stop of the fluctuation 1 to the start of the fluctuation of the next fluctuation.

  Note that, unlike the first embodiment, the conversation notice display is a display of only the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c). The conversation announcement effect (see FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A) displayed when the conversation notice is established is from the symbol low-speed fluctuation period of variation 2 to the symbol high-speed fluctuation period as shown in FIG. Is displayed by setting a conversation notice command for display indicating execution of a conversation notice effect at the start of fluctuation 2 during the period until the symbol low speed fluctuation period ends. In the third embodiment, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a data table of conversation notice and conversation notice effect is set separately as the conversation notice data table.

  In this embodiment, the conversation notice is set for each of the fluctuation 1 and the fluctuation 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversation notice data table is similar to the first embodiment. Is displayed by setting one conversation notice data table, in the notice display when the conversation notice is established, in the period from the fluctuation temporary stop of fluctuation 1 to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period of fluctuation 2 You may comprise so that it may be displayed straddling. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the conversation notice data table.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1429, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1429: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1431). If it is determined that the winning information command is received (S1431: Yes), the information indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the holding ball (S1432). Note that the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is configured to be able to determine the type of variation pattern selected at the start of variation as a result of the determination of success / failure.

  In the present embodiment, the winning information command is configured to be able to discriminate the determination result and the type of the variation pattern selected at the start of the variation. However, the winning information command is not limited to this, and the winning information command includes the conversation determination variation pattern. It may be configured to be able to discriminate part information of the variation pattern type such as whether or not. With this configuration, the winning information command can be simplified. Therefore, the control load required for command discrimination processing can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the variable display setting process 3 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1330). The variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment is different from the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment in that each process from S1509 to S1512 is from S1513 to S1515. Each process has been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After the process of S1508 is executed, the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether or not the display conversation notice command is set in S1425 of the command determination process 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) (S1513). If it is determined that the display conversation notice command is not set (S1513: No), a display stop type command is set (S1514). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display conversation notice command is set (S1513: Yes), the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command is set (S1515).

  Thus, in the variable display setting process 3 (FIG. 53, S1330) in the third embodiment, when the display conversation notice command is set, the stop symbol is set by setting the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command. Can be adjusted to the displayed conversation notice command for display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the content of the conversation notice does not match the stop symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the fluctuation pattern command process 2 (S2220) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S2220). In the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2310 and S2311 are added to the variation pattern command process (FIG. 35, S2205) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  After the process of S2306 is executed, the process of S2310 is executed. In the processing of S2310, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern that starts the variation is a conversation announcement variation pattern that is set when a conversation announcement is established (S2310). When it is determined that the conversation notice variation pattern is set when the conversation notice is established (S2310: Yes), the conversation notice data table of the conversation notice effect corresponding to the conversation notice displayed by the previous change is displayed data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2311). Although omitted in the present embodiment, processing such as setting of the rolling data table corresponding to the set conversation notice data table and initialization of the pointer is executed in the same manner as each processing from S2302 to S2305. Is done.

  With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the conversation notice data table corresponding to this conversation notice effect is set at the start of the fluctuation 2 fluctuation, so that the symbol low speed fluctuation period from the start of the fluctuation. The conversation notice effect is displayed during the period until the end of. Therefore, even if the variation 1 of the previous variation is a variation in which the lottery result is out of the range, the player can enjoy the conversation preview by the pattern displayed when the variation is stopped, and the content of the conversation preview is established. If there is, it can be enjoyed with the expectation of the conversation notice effect whether the reach will be established by the next fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player across a plurality of variations, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the third embodiment, the conversation notice effect displayed when the conversation notice is established is displayed from the start of the change until the end of the symbol low speed change period, as shown in FIG. Thus, when reach is established, the reach effect can be shown to the player after notifying that the reach will be achieved by the conversation notice effect. Further, if the reach is not reached, the temporary suspension is made as it is, and the player can be informed that the lottery result has been missed.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment executes the conversation notice when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern for the next variation is pre-read and determined. This is different from the first embodiment. The third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the conversation notice variation pattern is not provided in the fourth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a time chart when a conversation notice is executed in the fourth embodiment. The time chart of the conversation notice in the third embodiment is a conversation notice effect that is executed when the conversation notice is established, and is executed for a predetermined period from the start of the fluctuation 2 to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period. Is different. That is, in the third embodiment, since it is set exclusively as the conversation notice fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period is set in advance according to the period of the conversation notice effect. This is because, in the fourth embodiment, since it is a normal super-reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of the symbol low-speed fluctuation period differs depending on the fluctuation pattern. . Therefore, after all the conversation announcement effects are displayed, if the symbol is changing (before reaching the reach state), a display mode in which the reach is reached after the normal change is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the conversation notice effect is not configured to match the period from the start of fluctuation of the super reach fluctuation pattern to the end of the symbol low speed fluctuation period. A plurality of conversation notice effects may be set in advance, and the conversation notice effects may be selected according to the selected super reach display mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fourth Embodiment>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a conversation notice effect counter 223f is added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  The conversation notice effect counter 223f is a counter indicating how many times the special symbol has started to be changed since the conversation notice was set. The conversation notice effect counter 223f has an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on and the like, and is set to 1 in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440). 59, S1340), and 1 is added in the processing of S1521. On the other hand, in the processing of S1524, the initial value is reset to zero.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 57, the main process performed by MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in this 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process (see FIG. 57) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), compared to the main process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. ), The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340), respectively. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the command determination process 3 (S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1440). The processes of S1441 to S1443, S1447 to S1451, and S1454 in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment are the same as S1401 to S1403 and S1406 in the command determination process (FIG. 29, S1311) in the first embodiment. Processes similar to S1410 and S1419 are executed. Note that the processing of S1452 to S1453 in the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) of the fourth embodiment is the same as S1431 to S1432 of the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 52, S1420) in the third embodiment. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  After the process of S1443 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440) in the fourth embodiment is executed, the process of S1444 is executed. In the processing of S1444, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern lottery result received is out of order, and the type of variation pattern of the next variation is super reach (S1444). If it is determined that the current variation pattern lottery result is unacceptable and the next variation variation pattern is super-reach (S1444: Yes), a display conversation notice command is set (S1445). The value of the conversation announcement effect counter 223f is set to 1 (S1446). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a hit or the variation pattern of the next variation is a variation pattern other than the super reach (S1444: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the change in super reach is started next, if it is determined from the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the lottery result of the change that changes this time is out, the display of the conversation notice is displayed. Is displayed at the time of fluctuation temporary stop of fluctuation 1 as shown in FIG. Note that the conversation notice displayed here is a conversation notice only for conversation as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can determine at an early stage that the next change in super reach will be started when the conversation notice is executed. Therefore, a game can be played with the expectation that a conversation notice will be executed even if the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the present embodiment, it is not necessary to set a variation pattern for exclusive use of the conversation notice by providing the conversation notice on the condition that the next variation is super reach, and the number of variation patterns can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, if the current fluctuation is out and the next fluctuation fluctuation pattern is super reach, the conversation notice is executed, but this is not the only case. If the variation pattern is super reach, a lottery with a predetermined lottery probability may be executed, and if the lottery result is a win, a conversation notice may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the conversation notice is executed and to prevent the player from getting bored with the conversation notice at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the conversation notice is established, and all the contents are reached by the conversation notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the first to third embodiments, the following fluctuation occurs. It may also be configured to display a notice display (see FIG. 45 (c)) in which the conversation notice is not established in such a case that the change pattern that is not reach is also executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the variable display setting process 4 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 4 (S1340). In the variable display setting process 4 (FIG. 59, S1340) in the fourth embodiment, processes from S1520 to S1524 are added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  After S1511 or S1512 is executed, the process of S1520 is executed. In the processing of S1520, it is determined whether or not the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 1 (S1520). The conversation notice effect counter 223f is set to 1 when the display conversation notice command is set in the process of S1446 of the command determination process 3 (FIG. 58, S1440), and thus the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 1. This indicates that the display conversation notice command is set.

  When it is determined that the conversation notice counter 223f is 1 (S1520: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is not 1 (S1520: No), it is determined whether the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522). When it is determined that the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2 (S1522: Yes), a display conversation notice effect command is set (S1523). Thereafter, the value of the conversation notice effect counter 223f is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1524). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the conversation notice counter 223f is not 2 (S1522: No), this process is terminated.

  Thus, if the conversation notice effect counter 223f is 2, it indicates that the display conversation notice command is the next change after the set change, and therefore, at the start of the change of the change 2 as shown in FIG. Further, a display conversation notice effect command for displaying a conversation notice effect is set. Therefore, the conversation notice effect (see FIG. 6C and FIG. 7A) corresponding to the conversation notice can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the start timing of the change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination process 3 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2120). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the change pattern command process (FIG. 35 (a), S2205) is changed. The pattern command processing is changed to 2 (FIG. 54, S2220), and the processing of S2240 and S2241 is added. Note that the variation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 54, S2220) is the same as the process described in the third embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S2210 in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2120) in the fourth embodiment that the display conversation notice dedicated stop type command for display is not received (S2210: No), the process of S2240 is performed. Is executed. In the process of S2240, it is determined whether a display conversation notice effect command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2240). When it is determined that the display conversation notice effect command is received (S2240: Yes), the conversation notice effect process is executed (S2241).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the conversation notice effect processing (S2241) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the conversation notice effect processing (S2241).

  In the conversation notice effect processing (FIG. 61, S2241), first, a conversation notice effect data table corresponding to the previously changed stop symbol is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Note that the conversation notice effect data table is the same as the conversation notice data table in the first embodiment in which only the conversation notice effect is extracted and set. In the third embodiment, the conversation notice data table is configured to be individually set for the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect. However, the conversation notice data table dedicated to the conversation notice effect of the third embodiment and the fourth one are provided. The conversation announcement effect data table in the embodiment has the same configuration. Note that the conversation notice data table in the fourth embodiment is a data table in which display data for only the conversation notice is set, as shown in FIG.

  A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice effect data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2803), the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set data table (S2804), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2805), and this process ends.

  By configuring as in the fourth embodiment, the conversation notice can be executed without setting the conversation notice variation pattern dedicated to the conversation notice in advance. Therefore, the number of variation patterns can be reduced.

  Moreover, even if the lottery result is in a variation mode of losing, it can be expected that the conversation notice is executed. Therefore, even if the lottery result is off, the player can be entertained, and the problem that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

  In the second to fourth embodiments, the stop symbol on which the conversation notice is executed is described as a display mode (reach display mode) in which the left symbol and the right symbol are different from each other. It may be a display mode of a stop-reach symbol that is out of reach when it is out of mode, or a display mode that shows a jackpot after jackpot. In such a case, for example, in the notice of out-of-reach conversation, since it is the same pattern, special conversation contents are displayed like a brother's conversation, or the probability that the fluctuation is reach is higher than in other cases You may set so that it is high (when it is reach, the conversation notice with the stop pattern of unreach is easy to be executed). By doing so, it is possible to expect the conversation notice to be executed even if the player has any stop symbol. In addition, when a conversation notice is executed from a jackpot symbol after the jackpot, it is configured to be easily executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot. The player can greatly expect to become a game and can enjoy the game even after the big hit.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment executes the conversation notice when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern has been described. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when a conversation notice is executed, spheres of different colors are displayed, and one of them is selected by lottery and moves toward the comment window of the conversation notice. The contact is different in that the background of the comment window changes to the color of the sphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Characteristics of conversation notice in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 62A and FIG. 62B show a conversation notice in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when a conversation notice is displayed, spheres Q1 to Q4 having four different colors are displayed. Specifically, the sphere Q1 is a blue sphere, the sphere Q2 is a yellow sphere, the sphere Q3 is a green sphere, and the sphere Q4 is a red sphere. At the same time that the comment is displayed from the left symbol (the turtle symbol in FIG. 62 (a)), an effect display in which the sphere Q1 moves to the comment window displaying the comment is displayed. As shown in 62 (b), the color of the comment window is changed to blue, which is the same as the color of the sphere Q1.

  Note that which of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is to be moved toward the comment window is determined by lottery based on the selected variation pattern. The probability that the red sphere Q4 is selected when the lottery result of the variation pattern is the winning is set high, and then the success or failure determination is made in the order of the green sphere Q3, the yellow sphere Q2, and the blue sphere Q1. The probability of being selected when the result is a jackpot is set high.

  By configuring in this way, the player can be expected to be a big hit by selecting the red ball Q1 and changing the comment window to red.

  In the present embodiment, the four spheres are displayed each time, but some of them may be displayed by lottery or the like. For example, a plurality of blue spheres Q1 may be displayed. (For example, four) may be displayed, or three blue spheres Q1 may be displayed and one red sphere Q4 may be displayed. By comprising in this way, when the red sphere Q4 etc. with high expectation degree to the jackpot are included, it can be expected that the red sphere Q4 will not move. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game as to which ball is displayed.

  FIG. 63A is a diagram schematically showing a display effect selection table 1 that is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. FIG. This display effect selection table 1 is a selection table for determining the effect color (selection color) of the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the conversation notice and moving to the comment window. is there. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), a display effect counter for each effect color corresponding to the change pattern (here, for the sake of simplicity, the change pattern is schematically displayed as Nos. 1 to 7). 233k is allocated. Although details will be described later, the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 is temporarily stored in area 0 (not shown) of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. In the work RAM 233, areas 0 to 3 (not shown) are set in advance as storage areas for determining the effect colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4. Details of how to determine the production colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 will be described later.

  In addition, No. of the display effect selection table 234a5. 1-No. 4 is an out-of-context notice change pattern in which the lottery result is out. 6-No. Reference numeral 7 denotes a hit conversation notice change pattern in which the lottery result is a hit. For example, the no. If 4 is selected and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 30, the yellow sphere Q2 is selected.

  FIG. 63B is a diagram schematically showing the display effect selection table 2 that is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 2, a combination pattern of three effect colors excluding the effect colors determined in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63A) among the four effect colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4. It is a selection table for determining.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), combinations of effect colors are set, and the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each pattern for each variation pattern. For example, the selected variation pattern is No. If the variation pattern is 1 (outgoing conversation notice variation pattern) and the value of the display effect counter 233k is 70, the pattern 2 (blue: yellow: green) is selected. When the pattern 2 is selected, data indicating a production color of blue in area 1, yellow in area 2, and green in area 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is stored. Although details will be described later, in the process of S2515 of the display conversation notice process 2 (S2250, FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the areas 0 to 3 are assigned to any of the spheres Q1 to Q4, respectively. A process of determining whether to correspond is executed. In the case of pattern 2, data indicating blue in area 1, yellow in area 2, and green in area 3 is set. Similarly, patterns 3 to 5 are also set in areas 1 to 3 in order from the left color shown in the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63B).

  Thus, by configuring, even if the same combination of effect colors is selected for area 0 to area 3, the positions of the effect colors displayed on sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 can be set differently. Among the spheres Q1 to Q4, the same sphere moves to the comment window every time, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the moving sphere is discriminated before the sphere moves to the player. Moreover, the combination of the position of the production color displayed on the sphere Q1 to the sphere Q4 can be made random, and the production with a fresh taste can be performed for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Conversation notice data table in the fifth embodiment>
FIG. 64 is a data table for displaying the conversation notice, the conversation notice effect, and the notice effects of the balls Q1 to Q4 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the conversation notice data table of the first embodiment is that, in the conversation notice data table of the fifth embodiment, display data (sphere display information) for displaying the notice effect of the spheres Q1 to Q4, and the sphere Q1. ~ One of the spheres Q4 is selected and moved, and the display data of the effect that changes the background color of the comment window is set.

  It should be noted that information on each effect color of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is selected from the display effect selection table 1 (see 63 (a)) and the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63 (b)). The information of the selection color determined by the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63A) is set as the sphere display information (with movement) and the background selection color of the comment window.

  In the example of the conversation notice data table of FIG. 64, at the address 0032H, as the ball notice, data such as the symbol data of the spheres Q1 to Q4, the display position, the enlargement ratio, and the effect colors thereof are set. In the address 0064H, in addition to the sphere display information similar to the address 0032H, the comment of the conversation notice is set as comment content (display character information), display position information (X, Y), and color information of the background color of the comment window. . The display color that is normally displayed is white. At the address 0096H, as the sphere display information, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), display information after the set sphere of the spheres Q1 to Q4 has been set is set. Note that the movement of the sphere is set so that the display is moved by setting information that the sphere has gradually moved to the comment window up to the address 0096H. In addition, the display data of the selected color (the effect color selected in the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 64A)) is set as the background color of the comment window.

<Electric Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. In the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment, a display effect counter 233k is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

  The display effect counter 233k is a counter used when determining which of the spheres Q1 to Q4 displayed in the notice display of the conversation announcement displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be moved to the comment window. . This display effect counter 233k is acquired in the process of the display conversation notice process (FIG. 68, S2511) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In addition, one is added and updated in the process of S2107 of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The initial value is set to 0, and the upper limit value is 99. When the value is updated to 99 and further updated, the initial value is updated to 0.

  In addition, a display effect selection table 234a5 is added to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment compared to the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Since this display effect selection table 234a5 has been described above with reference to FIG. 63, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing executed by display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 66, the command determination process 4 (S2130) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 4 (S2130). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) in the fifth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the display conversation notice process (FIG. 36, S2209) is a display conversation. Changed to the advance notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  With reference to FIG. 67, the display conversation notice process 2 (S2250) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this display conversation notice process 2 (S2250).

  In the display conversation notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2511). Thereafter, a conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2512). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511, an effect color corresponding to the variation pattern is determined from the display effect selection table 1 (FIG. 63A), and the conversation determined in S2512. The data indicating the selected effect color is set in the area 0 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 (S2513).

  From the display effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 63 (b)) based on the remainder of the result obtained by adding 13 to the value obtained by squaring the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in S2511 and dividing by 100. A display pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and set in order in each of the areas 1 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 (S2514). The settings from area 1 to area 3 are set in advance for each display pattern, and are set to areas 1 to 3 in order from the left among the colors shown in FIG.

  Thus, when determining the display pattern from the display effect selection table 2 (FIG. 63 (b)), based on the remainder of squaring the value of the display effect counter 233k, adding 13, and dividing by 100, By configuring to select, it is possible to prevent a problem that the combination of the effect color and the display pattern selected from the display effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 63A) becomes the same every time. Also, by calculating different values from the same counter, the number of counters can be reduced, and the amount of data can be reduced.

  The value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2511 is divided by 4, and based on the remainder value, the spheres Q1 to Q4 corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 are set, and determined in the process of S2512. Information of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is set in the conversation notice data table, and the conversation notice data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2515). The method of determining the spheres Q1 to Q4 corresponding to the areas 0 to 3 is processed as follows. The remaining values 0 to 3 are set in advance so as to correspond to the areas 0 to 3, respectively. Areas 0 to 3 are allocated to the spheres Q1 to Q4 in ascending order from the remainder.

  Specifically, if the remainder is 3, the data for area 3 is assigned to sphere Q1, the data for area 0 is assigned to sphere Q2, the data for area 1 is assigned to sphere Q3, and the data for area 2 is assigned to sphere Q4. The

  By configuring in this way, the effect colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be made random. Therefore, even when the same color combination is selected, the combinations of the positions of the colors displayed on the spheres Q1 to Q4 can be varied, and the display modes can be diversified. Therefore, various effects can be provided by the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the processing of S2515 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2516). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2517), the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the data table (S2518), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2519), and this process ends.

  As described above, the selection color to be moved to the comment window is configured such that the red effect color is more easily selected in the jackpot conversation notice variation pattern than in the conversation notice variation pattern which is out of place. Therefore, when a red sphere is displayed and the player moves to the comment window, the player can increase his expectation for the jackpot.

  In addition, since the spheres Q1 to Q4 are determined to be random to move to the comment window, the player first displays the spheres Q1 to Q4, and moves in the case of a big hit. When there is a display color of a sphere with a high probability of playing, a game can be played with the expectation that the sphere will move to the comment window.

  In addition, for the combination of display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4, the jackpot conversation notice variation pattern is configured so that a combination of three or more red colors is selected more than the outlier conversation notice variation pattern. The player can also expect a big hit from the displayed combinations of the colors of the balls Q1 to Q4.

  In the fifth embodiment, the sphere Q1 to sphere Q4 are displayed as the notice symbols, and the background color of the comment window is changed with one of the colors. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “●” is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 corresponding to the number of reserved pieces as a holding display mode indicating the number of reserved balls, and the information in the winning information storage area 223a is discriminated before starting to fluctuate. Based on the information, the color of the hold display is varied. At the start of fluctuation, the color of the comment window may be varied depending on the color. When determining the color of the hold display, as in the fifth embodiment, if the determination result is a big hit, the player displays red by setting the probability that red is selected to be high. If you do, you can have expectations of jackpots. Furthermore, at the start of the change, the comment window of the conversation notice changes to that color, so that even if the change in the color of the hold display is overlooked, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the effect color to be moved to the comment window is selected and then the remaining sphere colors are determined. However, in the modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the display of the spheres Q1 to Q4 is performed. The difference is that a color is determined, and then a process of determining an effect color to be moved to the comment window is executed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 5th Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing the display effect selection table 3 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. In the display effect selection table 3, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each display color combination of the spheres Q1 to Q4 according to the determination result. Four combinations of display colors are selected from four colors of blue, yellow, green, and red. The numbers corresponding to the display colors of the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) indicate the number of spheres of that color.

  Specifically, if the determination result is a win, and the value of the display effect counter is 35, three green display colors and one red display color are 1 from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). Are selected. The selected display colors are stored in predetermined order in areas 0 to 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. As the order of storage, the display colors shown in the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) are stored in the areas 0 to 3 in the order of blue, yellow, green, and red. When there are three green display colors and one red display color, display color data indicating green in area 0, green in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 are stored. The Furthermore, to give an example, when the determination result is win and the display effect counter 233k is any one of 41 to 55, one blue display color, one yellow display color, and green One display color and one red display color are selected, and the four display colors constituting the spheres Q1 to Q4 are determined. In the modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the area 0 is set in advance corresponding to the sphere Q1, the area 1 is set to the sphere Q2, the area 2 is set to the sphere Q3, and the area 3 is set to the sphere Q4. Yes.

  Then, in accordance with the above-described predetermined order, data indicating the display color of blue in area 0, yellow in area 1, green in area 2, and red in area 3 of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is stored.

  The display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) is configured such that the red display color is more easily selected when the determination result is correct than when the determination result is wrong. . That is, the player can have an expectation for winning when the red color is included in the ball Q. Therefore, by displaying the spheres Q1 to Q4, it is possible to predict the success / failure before the determination result is notified by the third symbol. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect that the ball Q is displayed, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Further, in the display effect selection table 3 (FIG. 68), the case where two or more green display colors are included is set as compared with the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is incorrect. Therefore, the player can predict the determination result from the display color of the ball Q.

  Moreover, even if the combination of the display colors is selected or the same combination depending on whether the determination result is winning or not, by setting the selection probabilities to be different, It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the determination result from the display color.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the display effect selection table 4 which is one type of the display effect selection table 234a5 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. The display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69) is a data table for determining a sphere to be moved to the comment window among the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to the areas 0 to 3 separately depending on whether the determination result is a win or not. Specifically, if the determination result is win and the acquired value of the display effect counter 233k is 35, the area 1, that is, the sphere Q2 is determined as a sphere (selected color) that moves to the comment window. Note that the values of the display effect counters 233k in different ranges are assigned to the areas 0 to 3 depending on whether or not they are winning. In the case of winning, the area 2 and the area 3, that is, the sphere Q3 and the sphere Q4 are set so as to be selected more easily than in the case where they are out of place.

  By configuring in this way, the selected sphere can be easily set differently in the case of winning and the case of losing. Therefore, it is possible to predict the result of the success / failure determination from the selected sphere.

  In addition, in the case of winning, the area 2 and the area 3 are configured to be selected more easily than the case of being out of place, so that the display colors of green and red are displayed in the areas 2 and 3 according to a predetermined storage order. Since it is configured to be easily stored, the display color of red or green is easily selected as the display color that moves to the comment window. Therefore, it is easier to predict the result of the determination based on the display color of the sphere Q moving to the comment window, and a new enjoyment can be given to the player.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
In the modification of the fifth embodiment, the display conversation notice process 2 (FIG. 67, S2250) of the command determination process 4 (FIG. 66, S2130) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment is for display. The process is changed to the conversation notice process 3 (FIG. 70, S2260). About the other process, since the same process as 5th Embodiment is performed, the illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 70, the display conversation notice process 3 (S2260) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the display conversation notice process 3 (S2260).

  In the display conversation notice process 3 (FIG. 70, S2260), first, the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired (S2521). Thereafter, a conversation notice data table corresponding to the conversation notice command is determined from the conversation notice selection table 234a3 (S2522). Next, based on the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the process of S2521, a display color corresponding to the result of the determination is selected from the display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68), and the work of the display control device 114 is performed. The data are stored in areas 0 to 3 of the RAM 233 in a predetermined order. Here, the predetermined order is stored from area 0 to area 3 in ascending order in the order of display colors shown in display effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 68) (S2523).

  Based on the remainder of the result obtained by dividing the value of the display effect counter 233k acquired in the processing of S2521 by 4 and the result of the determination, the display effect selection table 4 (see FIG. 69) selects any of the areas 0 to 3 The selection result is set as a selection color of any of the spheres Q1 to Q4 to be moved to the comment window (S2524).

  The display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 determined in the process of S2523 and the sphere (selected color) to be moved to the comment window determined in the process of S2524 are set in the conversation notice data table determined in the process of S2522. (S2525).

  A transfer data table corresponding to the conversation notice data table set in the processing of S2522 is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2526). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2527), the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the data table (S2528), the pointer 233f is initialized (S2529), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the display colors of the spheres Q1 to Q4 are determined first, and the sphere (selected color) to be moved to the comment window is determined from among the display colors. The selection color to be moved can be set at random.

  In addition, when the determination result is a hit, it is configured such that red is easily selected as the display color to be selected, and the configuration is easier to determine than the case where the sphere Q4 in which the red display color is easily determined is out of the selected color. Therefore, by displaying red, the player can be expected to have a big hit. In addition, since the red display color sphere moves to the comment window, it is possible to further amplify the expectation of jackpot.

  Also, by moving the sphere Q4 to the comment window, even if the color of the sphere Q4 is a display color other than red, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot, and the red in the spheres Q1 to Q4. Even if the display color is not included, the player can be expected to win the jackpot. Therefore, the malfunction which a player loses the expectation to the jackpot from the display color of the ball | bowl Q1-ball | bowl Q4 and can be disappointed early can be suppressed.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the conversation notice executed when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the conversation notice variation pattern, the conversation notice is provided when the contents of the conversation are established with predetermined contents. The case where the production is executed has been described. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed by executing an effect that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 when the content of the conversation is established in the conversation notice. The difference is that a process of performing notification is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, after the left symbol and the right symbol among the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stopped, a comment indicating the content of the conversation is displayed from the left symbol, and then In the sixth embodiment, the left symbol is stopped and the middle symbol and the right symbol are scrolled (fluctuated display), and the left symbol is displayed. A difference is that the comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the symbol, and then the right symbol is stopped and displayed, and the comment indicating the content of the conversation notice is displayed from the right symbol. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  71 (a) to 71 (c) and 72 (a) to 72 (c) are diagrams showing display modes of a conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the third symbol starts to be changed, the left symbol is stopped and the comment which is the content of the conversation is displayed in the variation mode of the third symbol in the conversation notice variation pattern. FIG. In this case, the middle symbol and the right symbol are scroll-displayed from the top to the bottom of the third symbol at high speed or low speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the right symbol is stopped and the content of the conversation is displayed. In the case of FIG. 71 (b), since the conversation content of the right symbol is “OK!” With respect to the “Contest?” The case where is established is shown. On the other hand, FIG. 72 (c) shows a case where the comment of the conversation content is not displayed from the right symbol and the comment is not established even when the right symbol is stopped. As described above, when the conversation is not established, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed in any one of the symbols thereafter, and it is notified that the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is wrong.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), after the conversation is established, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), press the character “button to inform the player to press the frame button 22! Is displayed. Further, at this time, the middle symbol variation display disappears or is hidden by the characters, so two “◯” are displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 and alternately blinked to display the third symbol. It is configured to notify that the symbol is changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the frame button 22 is pressed, the “competitive effect” shown in FIG. 6 (c), which is a conversation notice effect, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. "Successful competition effect" is displayed. On the other hand, even if the conversation is established, if the variation pattern is such that the conversation notice effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the display mode in which the conversation is established even if the variation pattern in which the conversation notice effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that many effects in which conversation is not established are displayed.

  In addition, when a conversation is established, whether or not a conversation notice effect is to be executed can be made to feel to the player as if it is drawn by pressing the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is pressed. Can be given to the player.

  In this embodiment, when the conversation is established, the frame button 22 is pressed to notify that the conversation notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button 22 is pressed. The value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired, and it is determined whether the value is a predetermined hit value. In this case, the conversation notice variation pattern is configured so as to be established whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and a data table for displaying the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect is set separately. When a conversation notice effect is executed, a data table dedicated to the conversation notice effect is set. When a conversation notice effect is not executed, the display set in the display data table of the conversation notice variation pattern is set. The display content based on the data may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  With this configuration, it is possible to randomly determine whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the conversation notice variation pattern in various patterns.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 73, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment.

  In the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment, a button press flag 233n and a button effect flag 233p are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively, in the first embodiment.

  The button press flag 233n is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. This button pressing flag 233n is pressed (operated) by the voice lamp control device 113 during the effective period in the processing of S2271 of the command determination processing 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is turned on when a button press command output based on the fact is received. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the process of S3056 of the button press effect process (FIG. 77, S3050) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The button pressing flag 233n is set to OFF in the initial setting executed when the power is turned on.

  The button effect flag 233p is a flag indicating that the button effective period (set based on the conversation notice variation pattern) in which the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is set to be effective. This button effect flag 233p is set to ON based on the start timing of the button valid period in the process of S3052 of the button press effect process (FIG. 77, S3050) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. On the other hand, in the process of S3059, the button is set to OFF based on the end of the button valid period.

<Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 74, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 74, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter (not shown) is 0 (S1341). The SW valid time counter is a counter provided in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a counter for counting the valid time of the frame button 22. This SW valid time counter is automatically set when a fluctuation pattern (in this embodiment, a hit or missed conversation notice fluctuation pattern) in which a button valid period for validly setting the frame button 22 is set in advance is set. Is set automatically.

  If it is determined in the process of S1341 that the value of the SW valid time counter is 0 (S1341: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter is larger than 0 (S1341: No), the value of the SW valid time counter is decremented by 1 (S1342). It is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1343). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1343: Yes), a button pressing command is set (S1344). Thereafter, the value of the SW valid time counter is set to 0 (S1345). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1343 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1343: No), this process ends.

  In addition, about the other control processing which MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 6th Embodiment performs, the same processing as the control processing in 1st Embodiment is performed, The detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Sixth Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the sixth embodiment, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first embodiment. ) Command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) and display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103) are command determination processing 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) and display setting processing 2 (FIG. 76, S2180). Each has been changed. Since the other processes are the same as the control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the first embodiment, detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 75, the command determination process 5 (S2140) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 5 (S2140). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 75, S2140) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of S2270 to S2271 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment. Further, the processes from S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes from S2201 to S2213 and S2219 in the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2210, when it is determined that a display conversation notice dedicated stop type command has not been received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S2210: No), a button press command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. Is determined (S2270). If it is determined that the button press command has been received (S2270: Yes), the button press flag 233n is set to ON (S2271). On the other hand, when it is determined that the button press command has not been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2270: No), the process of S2212 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display setting process 2 (S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 2 (S2180). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) in the sixth embodiment, the process of S3050 is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. The processes from S3001 to S3021 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes from S3001 to S3021 in the first embodiment.

  After the process of S3007 is executed, the process of S3050 is executed. In the process of S3050, a button press effect process is executed. Details of the button press effect processing (S3050) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the button press effect process (S3050) which is one process in the display setting process 2 (FIG. 76, S2180) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the sixth embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this button press effect processing (S3050).

  In the button pressing effect process (FIG. 77, S3050), it is first determined whether or not the button valid period is started (S3051). Whether the button valid period is started is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. If it is determined in the process of S3051 that the button valid period has started (S3051: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3052). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start of the button valid period (S3051: No), the process of S3053 is executed.

  In the processing of S3053, it is determined whether the button is valid (S3053). If it is determined that the button is valid (S3053: Yes), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3054). If it is determined that the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3054: Yes), the conversation notice determination data table is displayed on the display data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 based on the selected variation pattern. (S3055). The conversation notice determination data table is a data table in which a notification mode is set as to whether or not the conversation notice effect shown in FIGS. 72A to 72B is executed. Thereafter, the button pressing flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are respectively set to OFF (S3056). On the other hand, in the process of S3054, when it is determined that the button press flag 233n is off (S3054: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3053 that the button is not valid (S3053: No), it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057). If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3057: Yes), an alternative notice display data table (not shown) is set (S3058). This alternative notice display data table is for notifying the player that the frame button 22 has not been pressed by the player during the button validity period. Instead of the player, a notification or the like indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is displayed. Thereafter, the button effect flag 233p is set to OFF (S3059), and this process ends.

  As described above, it is possible to determine that the player has not pressed the frame button 22 by determining whether the button effect flag 233p is set to ON even though it is outside the button valid period. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, by displaying the alternative display mode, it is possible to suppress the problem that the effect of the announcement of the conversation notice is not suitable. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance.

  Further, regarding the processing of S3057, when it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3057: No), this processing ends.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 87. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the previous variation is a stop symbol that can be notified of the conversation, it is determined whether or not the conversation notification is executed with the next variation, and a predetermined conversation notification is determined. The case where contents (comment contents) are displayed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the maximum time for displaying the conversation notice is set in advance in the conversation notice variation pattern, and within that time, the player's frame button 22 is displayed. The second embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the next set comment is displayed based on the operation. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 2nd Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<About the aspect of the conversation notice in the seventh embodiment>
78 (a) to 78 (c) are diagrams showing effects in the conversation notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. In the conversation notice shown in FIG. 78 (a), the success / failure determination result shown in FIG. 81 is out of place, and the content of the conversation notice of pattern 2 selected when the conversation notice is established or the success / failure determination result shown in FIG. It is the figure on which the 1st conversation preview content determined from the conversation preview content of the pattern 2 selected when it is a game state (probability change game state) is displayed. FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which comments indicating conversation contents are displayed from the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Actually, the conversation content is displayed before the right symbol before the left symbol, and then a comment indicating the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol after a predetermined time. During this time, the middle symbols are scroll-displayed from the upper direction to the lower direction at high speed or low speed.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the second symbol of the above-described pattern 2 in the conversation notice pattern table (FIG. 81 or FIG. 82) is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol. Will be displayed. Here, the figure of the state in which the comment content was respectively displayed by the left design and the right design was shown. Actually, the comment content is displayed before the left symbol, and then, after a predetermined time, the comment of the conversation content is displayed from the right symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the content of the conversation is established, a conversation notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (c). The conversation announcement effect shown in FIG. 78 (b) is for the player to compete to the goal with a plurality of symbols including the left symbol and the right symbol and reach the goal with the symbol that reaches the goal first. We are reporting. When this conversation notice effect is displayed, two “O” s are displayed side by side on the lower right side of the third symbol display device 81, and alternately flashing. This is a tentative symbol of the third symbol, and the player is notified that the third symbol is variably displayed by blinking.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the odd symbols “1, 3, 5, and 7” indicate that a high-probability gaming state is given in which the probability of determining a jackpot is higher than the normal state in the determination of success / failure after the jackpot. In the symbols, even symbols of “2, 4, 6, 8” are set to symbols indicating that a normal gaming state, which is a normal success / failure determination probability, is given even after a big hit. Therefore, the player can expect that the symbol indicating that the high probability gaming state is given will reach the first by the conversation notice effect and reach. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with interest in which symbol is winning. Therefore, it is possible to play with interest in the game until the player wins the jackpot, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Although details will be described later, by pressing the frame button 22, other types of comments of the left symbol and the right symbol can be displayed. Furthermore, since the conversation notice pattern table (see FIG. 81 and FIG. 82) is set so that the content of the conversation to be selected differs depending on the result of determination of success / failure, the player can select between the left symbol and the right symbol depending on the content of the comment. It is possible to determine which is easier to reach the goal first.

  In the seventh embodiment, since it is set so that the conversation notice is executed when the odd symbol is displayed on the left symbol and the even symbol is stopped and displayed on the right symbol in the previous variation, the player has the conversation notice conversation. If established, it is possible to know while enjoying the conversation notice effect which of the odd symbol and the even symbol will be reached.

  In this embodiment, in the conversation notice pattern table (see FIGS. 81 and 82), the third conversation content, that is, the comment is displayed until the player presses the frame button 22 twice within the maximum conversation notice period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be more or less.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that some of the 3rd symbols of 1-9 set beforehand may be displayed and a conversation notice effect may be performed, for example, the 3rd symbols of 1-9 In addition to some of them, a temporary symbol or the like (for example, a character to which the alphabet X is assigned) that does not notify which of the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is given may be displayed. . With this configuration, when a reach is established with a tentative symbol, the player may have an expectation for a high-probability gaming state until the jackpot is started or until the game after the jackpot is reached. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79A to 79B, a description will be given of the conversation notice and the conversation notice effect display period in the effect of the conversation notice in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 79 (a) is a time chart showing a case where the conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is established, and FIG. 79 (b) is a conversation notice effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the case where is not established.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the maximum conversation notice period, which is the maximum period during which the conversation notice can be executed, is set in advance in the conversation notice variation pattern in which the conversation notice is established. In the present embodiment, the maximum conversation notice period is set to 5 seconds before the start of display of a reach display mode such as super reach from the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the conversation notice period shown in FIG. 79A is configured to vary within the range of the maximum conversation notice period. The conversation notice period is a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) after the button valid period (set up to the maximum conversation notice period after the first conversation content is displayed) is set. ) Is set to end when the frame button 22 is not pressed.

  Thereafter, the remaining time until the start of the reach display mode is determined, and the conversation notice effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 83 (a) to (b) and FIG. 84, the conversation notice effect is configured such that three types of conversation notice effects are set by the conversation notice effect data table. A conversation notice effect data table composed of effect times closest to the time from the end of the conversation notice period to the start of the reach display mode is selected. The shorter the effect time, the shorter the time from when the conversation notice effect is displayed until the symbol reaches the goal (the movement speed is faster). For the remaining time from when the symbol has reached the goal until the reach display mode is displayed, the final display content that the symbol has reached is repeatedly displayed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to produce a conversation notice according to a player who presses the frame button 22 and a player who does not press the frame button 22. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed, a different effect is displayed as compared with the case where the frame button 22 is not pressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the conversation notice is not established, the maximum conversation notice period is set between the time when the third symbol starts to fluctuate and the fluctuating temporary stop. Therefore, the conversation notice can be enjoyed until the symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, even when the determination result is wrong, it is possible to play a game with the expectation of jackpot by the conversation notice.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment with respect to the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment. In the display control device 114 in the seventh embodiment, a button press flag 233n, a button effect flag 223p, and a progress counter 233r are added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, respectively. Further, in the character commission ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a conversation notice pattern table 234a6 and a conversation notice effect data table 234a7 are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The button press flag 233n and the button effect flag 233p are the same as those described in the sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The progress counter 233r is a counter for counting the time until the frame button 22 is pressed when the button effective period is set. This progress counter 233r is incremented by one when it is determined that the button is valid during the process of S3064 of the button press effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3067 that the button pressing flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on, the initial value is reset to zero. The progress counter 233r is configured to end the conversation notice period when the elapsed counter 233r is greater than or equal to a predetermined value in the process of S3065 (in this embodiment, a count value corresponding to 5 seconds).

  The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is a data table for determining the comment contents of the conversation notice. The conversation notice pattern table 234a6 is composed of a conversation notice pattern table (off) shown in FIG. 81 and a conversation notice pattern table (win) shown in FIG.

  81 is a table that is selected when the determination result is unacceptable. Further, the selected off-line conversation notice variation patterns are patterns of conversation notices from pattern 1 to pattern 3 depending on whether the conversation notice conversation conversation pattern is established or not established. Is set. Each pattern 1 to pattern 3 is assigned a value of the display effect counter 233k.

  More specifically, for example, when the result of the determination of success / failure is unsuccessful, the conversation notice variation pattern in which the conversation of the conversation notice is not established, and the value of the display effect counter is 40, the conversation content of pattern 2 Is selected. When this pattern 2 is selected, the first comment content “Comment with everyone!” Is displayed from the left design, and then “...” from the right design after a predetermined time. Will be displayed. After that, if the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, the comment “Please!” Is displayed from the left symbol, which is the second comment. "What should I do?" After that, if the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, the comment “Let's do it!” Is displayed from the left symbol, and after a predetermined time from the right symbol, “Stop this time! ! "Is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 seconds after the first or second comment is displayed, the display mode is switched from the comment of the conversation notice to the display mode set in the conversation notice variation pattern.

  In this way, within the maximum conversation notice period, the display of comments can be switched in accordance with the operation of the frame button 22, and even if a comment that does not hold the conversation for conversation notice is displayed once, Can be expected to replace the conversation that is established by pressing the frame button 22.

  Next, the conversation notice pattern table (win) shown in FIG. 82 is a table that is selected when the determination result is win. The conversation notice pattern table (winning) shown in FIG. 82 is divided into a case where the jackpot type is jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot) and a jackpot B (16 round normal jackpot). Pattern 1 to pattern 3 are set. The value of the display effect counter 233k is assigned to each of the patterns 1 to 3. Pattern 2 has the largest value of display effect counter 233k, and is configured to be easily selected.

  Here, the conversation content of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A will be described. Note that the conversation notice in the seventh embodiment is executed when an odd symbol is stopped on the left symbol and an even symbol is stopped on the right symbol in the previously changed stop symbol. Therefore, in the case where the symbol on the left is a jackpot, the symbol that informs that it is a jackpot A, and on the right symbol that the symbol that informs that it is a jackpot B if it is a jackpot is stopped in a state where the symbol is stopped Is executed.

  In the conversation notice of pattern 2 in the case of jackpot A, a comment “Let's compete together!” Is displayed from the left pattern at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the conversation notice fluctuation pattern. Thereafter, after a predetermined time, a comment “OK!” Is displayed from the right pattern, and it is notified that the conversation has been established. Thereafter, when the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, a comment “I will win this time !!” is displayed from the left pattern. Thereafter, after a predetermined time, a comment “May lose ...” is displayed from the right symbol, and a comment that causes the player to expect the left symbol to win in the conversation notice effect is displayed. After that, when the player presses the frame button 22 within 5 seconds, the comment “Tone is in great condition!” Is displayed from the left pattern, and after a predetermined time, the comment “That is terrible ...” from the right pattern. A comment is displayed, and a comment that makes the player expect the left symbol to win more is displayed.

  By configuring in this way, the left symbol is a symbol to which a jackpot A is given when a jackpot is made, so that the player can be expected to become a jackpot A more. In fact, when the determination result is jackpot A, it is easier to select than the case where the conversation notice of pattern 2 is jackpot B. Therefore, it can be expected that jackpot A will be a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the conversation content of pattern 2 selected when the determination result is jackpot B, the second and subsequent comments of the jackpot A, the left symbol, and the right symbol are interchanged. Thus, the player expects a big hit B instead of a big hit A. However, when the determination result is jackpot A, pattern 3 is set to the same conversation contents as pattern 2, so even with pattern 2, the expectation for jackpot is completely lost. Can be prevented.

  As described above, since the conversation pattern for notifying the jackpot type is set to be higher according to the jackpot type, the probability of selecting the conversation notice pattern is set higher, so that the determination result or the jackpot type can be determined from the conversation contents. Therefore, the player's attention can be more attracted to the conversation pattern. Accordingly, it is possible to make the conversation notice more enjoyable by the player.

  The conversation notice effect data table 234a7 is a data table for displaying the conversation notice effect shown in FIG. 78 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. The conversation notice effect data table 234a7 includes the conversation notice effect data table 1 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 83 (a) is set to 10 seconds, and the conversation in which the effect time shown in FIG. 83 (b) is set to 8 seconds. The notice effect data table 2 and the conversation notice effect data table 3 in which the effect time shown in FIG. 84 is set to 5 seconds are included.

  In the conversation notice data table 234a7, background data indicating the background of competition, display data indicating symbols to be displayed, and various effect display data are set. Although omitted, parameters such as various display positions and an enlargement ratio are set as in the display data table in the first embodiment. In the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 having different effect times, the speed at which the symbol moves to the goal is set to be different. More specifically, the displacement of the symbol display position is set to be variable for each address. In the conversation notice data table 234a7, in addition to the above description, a plurality is set for each winning symbol and each symbol to be displayed.

<Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
The frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307) of the main process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 74) in the sixth embodiment. , S1307) is executed. For the other processes, the same processes as in the second embodiment are executed.

<Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Seventh Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment, the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment is included. Command determination processing 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) and display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103), which are one processing, are divided into command determination processing 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) and display setting processing 3 (FIG. 86, S2650), respectively. has been changed. Since the other processes are the same as the control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 85, the command determination process 6 (S2190) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2190). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 85, S2190) in the seventh embodiment is changed from the command determination process 2 (FIG. 48, S2110) in the second embodiment to the process of S2280 in the displayed conversation notice process (S2209). The processing of S2281 to S2282 is added. The processes from S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 are executed in the same manner as the processes from S2201 to S2206, S2215 to S2218, and S2220 to S2223 in the second embodiment.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the variation pattern is that the conversation notice can be established (S2221: Yes), the value of the display effect counter 233k is acquired, and based on the value, the result determination result, and the jackpot type Then, the conversation notice pattern is selected from the conversation notice pattern table 234a6 (S2280).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that the display stop type command has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether a button press command has been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S2281). If it is determined that a button press command has been received (S2281: Yes), the button press flag 233n is set to ON (S2282).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the display setting process 3 (S2650) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 3 (S2650). In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) in the seventh embodiment, a button press effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the second embodiment. Yes. For the other processes, the same processes as in the second embodiment are executed.

  After the processing of S3007 is executed, button press effect processing 2 is executed (S3060). Details of the button press effect process 2 (S3060) will be described with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 87, the button press effect process 2 (S3060) which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 86, S2650) which MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 performs is demonstrated. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this button press effect processing 2 (S3060).

  In the button pressing effect process 2 (FIG. 87, S3060), it is first determined whether or not the button valid period is started (S3061). Whether the button valid period is started is set in advance in the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern, and is determined by the setting. If it is determined in the process of S3061 that the button valid period has started (S3061: Yes), the button effect flag 233p is set to ON (S3062). On the other hand, if it is determined that the button valid period has not started (S3061: No), the process of S3063 is executed.

  In the process of S3063, it is determined whether the button is valid (S3063). When it is determined that the button is valid (S3063: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S3064). It is determined whether the value of the progress counter 233r is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (S3065). In the present embodiment, the predetermined value here is set to a value indicating 5 seconds. In the processing of S3065, when it is determined that the value of the progress counter 233r is less than the predetermined value (S3065: No), it is determined whether the button pressing flag 233n is on (S3066). If it is determined that the button press flag 233n is off (S3066: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the button press flag 233n is on (S3066: Yes), the value of the progress counter 233r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3067).

  In this way, by resetting the progress counter 233r based on the determination that the button press flag 233n indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is on, the time when the frame button 22 is not pressed can be accurately determined. Can be timed.

  After the processing of S3067 is executed, the display data of the next conversation content is set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the selected conversation notice pattern (S3068), and the button press flag 233n is set off. (S3069). Here, if the data of the first conversation content is set, the data of the second conversation content is set, and if the data of the second conversation content is set, the data of the third conversation content is set. Is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3063 that the button is not valid (S3063: No), or if the value of the elapsed counter 233r is determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined value in the process of S3065 (S3065: Yes) ), The process of S3070 is executed. In the process of S3070, it is determined whether the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070). If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is off (S3070: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined that the button effect flag 233p is on (S3070: Yes), it is determined whether the selected conversation notice variation pattern is a variation pattern that establishes a conversation (S3071). If it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is established (S3071: Yes), the conversation notice effect data table is determined based on the remaining time until the reach display mode. Here, for example, when the remaining time is 10 seconds or more, the conversation notice effect data table 1 (see FIG. 83 (a)) with the effect time of 10 seconds is selected, and the remaining time is less than 8 seconds to less than 10 seconds. In this case, when the conversation notice effect data table 2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) is selected and the remaining time is 5 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the conversation notice effect data table 3 (see FIG. 83 (c)). ) Is selected.

  Thus, it is constituted until the reach display mode is started by being configured to select any one of the conversation notice effect data tables 1 to 3 based on the remaining time until the reach display mode is started. It is possible to execute a conversation notice effect by effectively using time. In addition, since the maximum conversation notice period is set 5 seconds before the reach display mode is started, even if the remaining time is shortest, all the conversation notice effects can be shown to the player. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S3070, when it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is not established (S3071: No), the process of S3073 is executed.

  In the process of S3073, the end of the conversation notice is set (S3073). Here, when the conversation notice effect is being executed, the display data of the last address in the conversation notice effect data table is set to be repeatedly displayed until the reach display mode is started. In addition, when the conversation notice is not established and the conversation notice is ended, the display based on the display data table of the set conversation notice variation pattern is set to be displayed.

  After the processing of S3073 is executed, the button effect flag 233p is set to OFF (S3074), and the elapsed counter 233r and the button valid period are reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3075).

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 stops displaying the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol determination flag for determining the stop symbol is displayed. Processing to store the previous stop symbol discrimination flag in the area for storing was executed. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that no area for storing the previous stop symbol determination flag is provided and the process for storing the previous stop symbol determination flag is not executed. . Further, in the eighth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the stop pattern of the previous fluctuation is determined, whether the conversation notice can be executed, and the process of executing the conversation notice is performed. This is different from the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Eighth Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment is a variation display of the main process (see FIG. 28) with respect to the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320). Note that the details of the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 47, S1320) have already been described in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Eighth Embodiment>
In the V interrupt process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the eighth embodiment, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first embodiment. ) Command determination processing (FIG. 34, S2102) and display setting processing (FIG. 38, S2103) are command determination processing 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) and display setting processing 4 (FIG. 91, S2750). Each has been changed. Since the other processes are the same as the control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 89, the command determination process 7 (S2350) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 in 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 7 (S2350). The command determination process 7 (FIG. 89, S2350) in the eighth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern command process (FIG. 35 (a), S2205) varies. The processing is changed to pattern command processing 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), and each processing from S2208 to S2211 is deleted. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S2204, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has been received (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command process 3 is executed (S2450). Details of the variation pattern command process 3 (S2450) will be described with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 90, the fluctuation pattern command process 3 (S2450) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 3 (S2450).

  In the variation pattern command process 3 (FIG. 90, S2450), first, it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value indicating 3 seconds or more) (S2451). When it is determined that the value of the time counter 233h is less than the predetermined value (S2451: No), it is determined whether the stored stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol that can be notified in conversation. Here, the symbol that can be notified of the conversation is a combination in which the left symbol and the right symbol are symbols other than reach.

  In the present embodiment, a combination other than reach is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a conversation notice may be performed using a combination of reach. In such a case, even if the stop symbol is out of reach, it is possible to make it appear as if the two fluctuations are one fluctuation by executing the conversation notice in the next fluctuation. Moreover, you may comprise so that a conversation notice may be performed even if it is the design of all the same designs after jackpot. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game immediately after the jackpot by setting a special conversation notice, for example, a conversation with contents related to the jackpot.

  In the process of S2452, when it is determined that the stop symbol determination flag indicates a symbol that can be notified of conversation (S2452: Yes), the selected variation pattern is a conversation notification variation pattern that will establish a conversation. Is determined (S2453). If it is determined that the variation pattern is that the conversation is established (S2453: Yes), a display conversation notice process is executed (S2209). Since this display conversation notice process (S2209) is the same as that already described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 36, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2453 that the conversation notice variation pattern is such that the conversation is not established (S2453: No), a display conversation dummy notice process is executed (S2222). Since this display dummy dummy notice process (S2222) has already been described in detail in the second embodiment with reference to FIG. 49B, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S2456, a display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2456).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is created. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variation effect having a variation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main controller 110. The next variation pattern command for display is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this embodiment, the variation time actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the variable effect having the instruction is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main display device 110 displays the next display pattern. Until the command is received, the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can feel the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the design.

  Next, initial symbol information is set in the display data table set in the processing of S2456 based on the stop symbol discrimination flag (S2456). Here, in the display data table in the eighth embodiment, initial symbol information is set for all the symbol display offset information until the high-speed fluctuation ends based on the stop symbol discrimination flag. As a result, when the third symbol is scrolled and displayed one frame at a time without any discomfort from the previous variation stop symbol at the start of variation, and the high-speed variation display is switched to the low-speed variation display, based on the stop symbol determination flag determined by the current variation. Thus, the symbol can be offset and displayed with the offset information, and the symbol can be variably displayed, and the symbol can be naturally stopped and displayed with the correct symbol.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2456 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2458). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table set by the processing of S2456 is turned on, and other display data tables The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is set to OFF (S2459). In the display setting process, it is easily determined which variation pattern the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303. can do.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2456, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2460), and the pointer 233f. Is initialized to 0 (S2461). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2462).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the display setting process 4 (S2750) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the display setting process 4 (S2750). In the display setting process 4 (FIG. 91, S2750) in the eighth embodiment, the process of S3015 is deleted from the display setting process (FIG. 38, S2103) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  As described above, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the stop symbol determination flag is copied, and the previous stop symbol is determined and the symbol variation is performed without executing the process of holding it during the next variation. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute a conversation notice. Therefore, the process when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 stops and displays the third symbol can be simplified. Therefore, the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or when the access ends, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on to turn on the error occurrence flag in the display setting process (see FIG. 38). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 39) when the above is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, since the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be used in an operation check in a player, a hall-related person or a factory at the time of manufacture. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. , All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed so as to be reduced to an invisible level, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image y image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases, respectively), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Moreover, you may implement combining some or all of each embodiment described above, a modification, etc.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group>
Based on the fact that the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of determination of success or failure of the game consisting of at least a plurality of symbol sequences, the display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means, and the result of determination of success or failure of the game Then, as the identification information indicating the winning, the stop symbol determining means for displaying the same symbol on the display control means, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped. The reach display mode in which the other symbol columns except for one symbol column are displayed in the same symbol among the plurality of symbol columns before being displayed, and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. In the symbol display control means to be displayed in the combination of the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means, and in the non-reach display mode, in one symbol row There is an effect display means for displaying a specific effect display related to the one based on the displayed symbol and one based on the symbol displayed in another symbol row, and the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means is A gaming machine A1 comprising: a privilege granting unit that displays the reach display mode by the symbol display control unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the identification information indicating the result of determining whether or not the game is made up of at least a plurality of symbol strings is displayed by the display means. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the winning / bad determination result of the game, the stop symbol determining means displays the same symbol on the display control means as the identification information indicating the winning. After starting the dynamic display of the identification information and before it is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating the determination result, the other symbol sequences except for one symbol sequence are the same in the plurality of symbol sequences. The symbol display control means displays the displayed reach display mode and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. Displayed by a combination of non-reach display modes by the symbol display control means, and among those non-reach display modes, those based on the symbols displayed in one symbol row and those based on the symbols displayed in the other symbol rows A specific effect display related to the above is displayed by the effect display means. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach display mode is displayed by the privilege giving means by the symbol display control means. Thereby, even when a non-reach display mode is displayed, it is possible to have a big hit expectation by displaying a specific effect display that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the player can play a game with an expectation for a big jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, the specific effect display satisfies the first condition with the first specific effect and the first specific effect displayed in relation to the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the other symbol row. And at least a second specific effect displayed in connection with the first specific effect, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the first condition is satisfied by the first specific effect and the first specific effect displayed in relation to the symbols stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the other symbol rows, the first specific effect is selected. At least a specific effect is composed of the second specific effects that are displayed in connection with each other. The predetermined condition is established when the second condition is satisfied in the second specific effect. Thereby, since it is displayed in a reach display mode when a plurality of conditions are satisfied, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be increased step by step. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine A2, the symbols displayed in the one symbol row and the other symbol rows are each constituted by a plurality of different symbols having specific symbols, and the first specific effect of the specific effect display is: A comment is displayed based on the symbol pattern displayed in the symbol pattern and the symbol pattern displayed in the other symbol column, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. A gaming machine A3 configured to satisfy the first condition.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific pattern. A comment is displayed based on a symbol pattern displayed in one symbol row and a symbol pattern displayed in another symbol row, and the first combination when the combination of comments is a predetermined combination. The first specific effect of the specific effect display is configured so that the condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the first condition is established by the combination of comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  In the gaming machine A2, the one symbol row and the other symbol row are each constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific symbol, and the second specific effect of the specific effect display is the one symbol string The achieved dynamic display mode that satisfies the second condition and the unachieved dynamic display that does not satisfy the second condition, in which the symbol pattern displayed on the screen and the symbol pattern displayed on the other symbol row are respectively displayed. Any one of the modes is displayed at least. A gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, one symbol row and another symbol row are constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific pattern. Achieved dynamic display mode satisfying the second condition in which the symbols of the symbols stopped and displayed in one symbol row and the symbols of symbols stopped and displayed in the other symbol rows are respectively displayed, and unachieved not satisfying the second condition Either one of the dynamic display modes is displayed at least in the second specific effect of the specific effect display. Thereby, even if the second specific effect is performed, the symbol pattern that has been stopped is also displayed, so that it is possible to easily inform the player that the lottery game is still in progress. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the display control means dynamically displays the plurality of symbol rows by scroll-displaying in a predetermined direction, and the symbols are displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means. While it is being performed, the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that a symbol row other than that displayed in the non-reach display mode is scrolled and dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of symbol sequences are dynamically displayed by scroll display in a predetermined direction by the display control means. While being displayed in the non-reach display mode by the symbol display control means, the symbol rows other than those displayed in the non-reach display mode are scrolled and dynamically displayed by the display control means. Thereby, even when the specific effect display is displayed, the player can easily identify that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

<Feature B group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, and slave control means for executing control of the game by receiving a control signal from the main control means, the main control means based on the establishment of the start condition And a go / no-go judgment means for executing the go / no-go judgment, and a go / no-go judgment signal indicating the result of the go / no-go judgment by the go / no-go judgment means, and outputting to the sub-control means, The sub control means includes a display means for displaying identification information for notifying the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of at least a plurality of symbols, and a display control means for displaying the identification information on the display means. Stop symbol determining means for determining a symbol for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol strings as the identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result of the success / failure determination signal. In a gaming machine in which a game is executed, the slave control means displays a specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before on the display means based on the start of the next lottery game. And a special effect display means for displaying a special effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the special effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Game machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means that executes control of the game, whether or not is determined is determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The success / failure determination signal indicating the determination result of the success / failure determination means is generated by the success / failure determination signal generation means, and is output to the slave control means that controls the game according to the control signal output from the main control means. In the sub control means, the display means displays identification information for notifying the result of the determination on the basis of the determination result signal including at least a plurality of symbol strings. Identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. The symbol for stopping and displaying a plurality of symbol strings is determined by the stop symbol determining means as identification information indicating the result of the determination on the basis of the hit determination signal. A specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the lottery game executed immediately before is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the benefit effect is displayed by the benefit effect display means. Thereby, since the specific effect display related to the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is displayed, two lottery games can be shown to the player like one lottery game. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a bonus effect is displayed, so that the game can be enjoyed more. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine B1, the slave control means has stop symbol discrimination means for discriminating the stop symbol of the previous lottery game, and the effect display means of the slave control means is predetermined by the stop symbol discrimination means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed based on the fact that it is determined that the stop symbol is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the sub control means, the stop symbol of the previous lottery game is discriminated by the stop symbol discriminating means. A specific effect display is displayed by the effect display means based on the fact that the stop symbol is determined to be a predetermined stop symbol by the stop symbol determining means. Thereby, the opportunity that a specific production | presentation is displayed can be made random, and there exists an effect that a fresh taste can be given by performing a specific production | presentation.

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means acquires the determination means for determining whether or not the determination is correct by the determination means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the lottery determination information acquired by the acquisition means. Storage means for storing until the condition is satisfied, pre-determination means for determining the result of the determination before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the determination information stored in the storage means, and the identification information Dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode among the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the display unit on the display unit; Prior dynamic display mode discrimination means for discriminating the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit before the lottery condition is satisfied based on the discrimination information discriminated by the prior discrimination unit. A pre-signal generation unit that generates a pre-signal indicating a determination result between the pre-dynamic display mode determination unit and the pre-determination unit and outputs the pre-signal to the sub control unit, A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the dynamic display mode, and the effect display unit of the slave control unit determines that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior signal. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect display is displayed in relation to the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control unit, the acquisition unit acquires the determination information that is determined to be correct by the determination unit based on the establishment of the start condition. The success / failure determination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit until the lottery condition is satisfied. Based on the determination information stored in the storage unit, the determination result is determined by the prior determination unit before the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit among the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the determination result. Based on the discrimination information discriminated by the prior discrimination means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is discriminated by the prior dynamic display mode discrimination means before the lottery condition is satisfied. A prior signal indicating the discrimination result between the prior dynamic display mode discriminating means and the prior discriminating means is generated by the prior signal generating means and output to the sub-control means. A predetermined specific dynamic display mode is set in the plurality of dynamic display modes. In the slave control means, when it is determined that the specific dynamic display mode is determined by the prior signal, it is related to the stop symbol of the lottery game immediately before the identification information dynamically displayed in the specific dynamic display mode. Then, the specific display effect is displayed by the effect display means. Thereby, when the specific dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific effect display can be displayed, and the lottery game continues from the lottery game immediately before the specific dynamic display mode. It can be reminiscent of a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that gives the player a novel impression.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control means displays the same symbol in each of the plurality of symbol rows that is the identification information indicating that the determination result is successful, and then the player A bonus game execution means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the game, and the slave control means starts dynamic display of the plurality of symbol sequences and then stops display with the identification information indicating the result of the determination. In the meantime, among the plurality of symbol sequences, the symbol display control for displaying in the reach display mode in which the other symbol sequences other than one symbol column are displayed in the same symbol and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode A bonus effect display means of the slave control means for displaying the bonus effect for informing the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed. Machine B4

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. In other words, in the main control means, after the same symbol is displayed in a plurality of symbol sequences that are identification information indicating that the determination result is a win, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the jackpot game execution means. Is done. In the sub control means, after the dynamic display of the plurality of symbol sequences is started and the display is stopped with the identification information indicating the determination result, the other symbol sequences other than the one symbol sequence are excluded. The symbol display control means displays the reach display mode in which the same symbol sequence is displayed and the non-reach display mode different from the reach display mode. A privilege effect that informs the player in advance whether or not the reach display mode is displayed is displayed by the privilege effect display means. Thereby, the expectation to the jackpot can be enhanced by displaying the privilege effect. Therefore, the player can play the game in the hope that the benefit effect is displayed, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the symbols constituting the plurality of symbol rows are each configured by a plurality of different symbols having specific symbols, and the specific effect display is one symbol among the stopped symbols. Comments are displayed based on the symbols of the symbols stopped and displayed in the columns and the symbols of symbols stopped and displayed in the other symbols, and the predetermined condition is met when the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination. A gaming machine B5 that is configured to satisfy the above.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. In other words, symbols constituting a plurality of symbol sequences are respectively constituted by a plurality of different symbols having a specific pattern. Among the stopped symbols, when a comment is displayed based on the symbol of the symbol stopped in one symbol row and the symbol of the symbol stopped in the other symbol row, and the combination of the comments is a predetermined combination The specific effect display is configured so that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the first condition is established by the combination of comments. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game easily.

<Feature C group>
A determination unit for determining whether or not the game is successful, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, a display control unit for displaying the identification information on the display unit, and the identification information A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed on the display unit, and when the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display unit, the player In the gaming machine in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the game is started, the display means determines whether the identification information has started dynamic display in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit, Auxiliary information display means for displaying information related to the game separately from the identification information until the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, and the plurality of instruction symbols are displayed on the display means. indicate Display information display means, and auxiliary display mode control means for displaying on the auxiliary information display means a display mode related to one of the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display means. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C1, whether or not the game is successful is determined by the determination unit. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. Identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is successful is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started. Information related to the game from when the identification information is started in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means until the identification information indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. Auxiliary information display means that is displayed separately from the identification information is provided in the display means. Instruction symbols indicating a plurality of display modes are displayed on the display means by the instruction symbol display means. Of the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display means, the display mode related to one instruction symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means. Thereby, the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means can be noticed by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C1, an instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbols to be displayed on the instruction symbol display means from the plurality of instruction symbols based on the determination result of the two or more instruction symbols, and the instruction symbol determination Based on the determination result, the auxiliary display mode control unit displays the display mode of the auxiliary information display unit in a display mode related to the command pattern from among the two or more instruction symbols determined by the unit. A gaming machine C2 comprising display instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbol.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, two or more instruction symbols from among the plurality of instruction symbols to be displayed on the instruction symbol display means are determined by the instruction symbol determination means based on the determination result. An instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display unit by the auxiliary display mode control unit in the display mode related to the command pattern, based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the command symbol is determined by the instruction symbol determination unit. The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determining means. As a result, two or more instruction symbols are determined based on the determination result, so that the player can guess the determination result based on the type of instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, the display mode of the auxiliary information display means is displayed in the display mode related to the instruction symbol determined based on the determination result, and the player can predict a more detailed determination result. is there.

  In the gaming machine C1, the auxiliary display mode control unit determines the instruction symbol for displaying the display mode of the auxiliary information display unit in a display mode related to the instruction symbol based on the determination result from the plurality of instruction symbols. In addition to the instruction symbols determined by the first instruction symbol determining means and the first instruction symbol determining means, the instruction symbols to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means are selected from among the plurality of instruction symbols on the basis of the determination result. A gaming machine C3, comprising: a second instruction symbol determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first indication symbol determination means determines the instruction symbol for displaying the display manner of the auxiliary information display means in the display manner relating to the indication symbol by the auxiliary display manner control means based on the determination result of the plurality of indication symbols. . In addition to the instruction symbols determined by the first instruction symbol determining means, the instruction symbols to be displayed on the auxiliary information display means are determined from the plurality of instruction symbols by the second instruction symbol determining means based on the determination result. Thereby, the player can predict the success / failure determination result from the type of the instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be more enjoyed and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  Any of the gaming machines C1 to C3 has a display position determining means for determining a display position of each of the instruction symbols displayed on the auxiliary information display means by a predetermined lottery control. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the display position of each instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means is determined by the predetermined lottery control by the display position determination means. The position becomes more random, and there is an effect that a fresh taste can be given to the player.

<Feature D group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, and slave control means for executing control of the game according to a control signal from the main control means, the main control means, based on the establishment of the start condition, A determination unit for executing the determination of whether or not to perform the determination, and a determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine the result of the determination by the criticizing unit, the sub-control unit from the main control unit Display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination result, and display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, based on the establishment of the start condition In the gaming machine in which the lottery game is performed by starting the dynamic display of the identification information, the main control means displays an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result on the slave control means. Generate Identification signal generating means for receiving the identification information, and the sub-control means determines identification information indicating the validity determination result based on the identification signal, and the success / failure determined by the identification information determination means. Storage means for storing identification information indicating the determination result, and the display control means of the slave control means, when starting a new lottery game based on the establishment of the start condition, Identification information discriminating means for discriminating the identification information indicating the success / failure judgment result displayed in the lottery game immediately before the lottery game, and identification based on the identification information discriminated by the previous identification information discrimination means Initial dynamic display setting means for executing a setting for starting dynamic display of the identification information of the new lottery game from the information, and after the initial dynamic display setting means performs the setting, the identification information determination means is determined. The storage unit stores the identification information indicating the determination result of the new lottery game overwritten on the identification information indicating the determination result of the previous lottery game stored in the storage unit and stored in the storage unit. Dynamic display stop means for executing stop of dynamic display at the timing when the identification information of the new lottery game determined by the control information and the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed; A gaming machine D1 having the following characteristics.

  According to the gaming machine D1, game control is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. In the main control means, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The success / failure determination signal indicating the determination result of the success / failure by the critical determination means is generated by the success / failure determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the determination based on the determination result signal from the main control means. Identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, dynamic display of identification information is started and a lottery game is performed. In the main control means, the identification signal generating means generates and outputs an identification signal for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination as to whether or not the slave control means is present. In the slave control means, the identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the identification information determination means based on the identification signal. The storage unit stores identification information indicating the result of the determination as to whether or not the identification information determination unit has determined. In the display control means of the slave control means, when a new lottery game is started based on the establishment of the start condition of the slave control means, the success / failure displayed in the lottery game immediately before the new lottery game Identification information indicating the determination result is determined by the previous identification information determination means. Based on the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination unit, the initial dynamic display setting unit performs setting for starting dynamic display of the identification information of a new lottery game from the identification information. After the initial dynamic display setting means is set, the previous lottery game in which the identification information indicating the determination result of the new lottery game determined by the identification information determination means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Is stored in the storage means by overwriting the identification information indicating the determination result. The dynamic display is stopped by the dynamic display stop means at the timing when the new lottery game identification information determined by the identification information determination means stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed. As a result, it is not necessary to store both the new lottery game and the previous lottery game for the identification information indicating the determination result, and the amount of data stored in the storage area of the storage means is reduced. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in the data amount of the storage unit can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the slave control means displays a specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means on the display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. A game comprising: an effect display means; and a privilege effect display means for displaying a benefit effect when the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the slave control means, the specific effect display related to the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is displayed on the display means by the effect display means based on the start of the next new lottery game. When the content of the specific effect display displayed by the effect display means satisfies a predetermined condition, the benefit effect is displayed by the benefit effect display means. As a result, the specific effect related to the identification information displayed in the previous lottery game is displayed based on the start of a new lottery game, so that the dynamic display of the identification information is continued. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that two lottery games can be shown as one lottery game.

In the gaming machine D2,
The effect display means displays the specific effect display when the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is predetermined identification information. Machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, when the identification information determined by the previous identification information determination means is predetermined identification information determined in advance, the specific effect display is performed by the effect display means. Since it is displayed, a specific effect display is displayed at a random opportunity, and there is an effect that an effect with a fresh taste can be provided by the player.

<Feature E>
A determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct;
Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means;
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
Dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from among a plurality of dynamic display modes as a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine having operating means that can be operated by a player,
The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which displaying the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display is preset,
The display period of the first specific effect display is extended while the player operates the operation means within the display period of the first specific effect display, while the display period of the first specific effect display is extended. A first specific effect adjusting means for shortening a display period of the first specific effect display based on the fact that the operation means has not been operated by the player for a predetermined time;
When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjustment unit, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened, while the first specific effect adjustment unit reduces the first specific effect display. And a second specific effect adjusting means for extending the display period of the second specific effect display when the display period of the specific effect display is shortened.

  According to the gaming machine E1, whether or not a game is appropriate is determined by the appropriateness determination means. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. Identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from among a plurality of dynamic display modes. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a specific dynamic display mode in which the first specific effect display and the second specific effect display are set in advance. The display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjustment means based on the player operating the operating means within the display period of the first specific effect display. Further, the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjusting means based on the fact that the operating means has not been operated by the player for a predetermined time within the display period of the first specific effect display. The When the display period of the first specific effect display is extended by the first specific effect adjustment means, the display period of the second specific effect display is shortened by the second specific effect adjustment means. Further, when the display period of the first specific effect display is shortened by the first specific effect adjustment means, the display period of the second specific effect display is extended by the second specific effect adjustment means. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the effect time as the player intends while suppressing the change in the display period of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect more tailored to the player.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with a winning game ball at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .
In such a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a notice effect related to a game is executed by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-279560).
In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest in gaming.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game and prevents the player from getting bored with the game early. For the purpose.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a determination unit for determining whether a game is successful, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and a display unit for displaying the identification information. Display control means for displaying the identification information; and dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. When the identification information indicating that it is a win is displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started, and the display unit displays the dynamic display in which the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. There is auxiliary information display means for displaying the information related to the game separately from the identification information after the dynamic display is started in the mode and before the identification information indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. And the plurality of An indication symbol display control means for displaying a symbol on the display means, and a display mode related to one indication symbol among the indication symbols displayed by the indication symbol display control means is displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Auxiliary display mode control means.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 2, in the gaming machine of technical idea 1, the instruction symbol displayed by the instruction symbol display control means determines whether or not two or more of the instruction symbols out of the plurality of instruction symbols are correct. An instruction symbol determining means for determining based on the result, and the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means, based on the result of the determination of validity, out of the two or more instruction symbols determined by the instruction symbol determining means. Display instruction symbol determining means for determining the instruction symbol for displaying the display mode of the means in a display mode related to the instruction symbol.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, whether or not the game is successful is determined by the determination unit. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. Identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is successful is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is started.
There is information related to the game between the start of the dynamic display in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time when the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Auxiliary information display means that is displayed separately from the identification information is provided in the display means. Instruction symbols indicating a plurality of display modes are displayed on the display means by the instruction symbol display control means. Of the instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display control means, a display mode related to one instruction symbol is displayed on the auxiliary information display means by the auxiliary display mode control means.
Thereby, the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means can be noticed by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the information displayed on the auxiliary information display means, and the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, two or more instruction symbols out of a plurality of instruction symbols displayed by the instruction symbol display control means are determined by the instruction symbol determining means based on the result of the determination of validity. An instruction to display the display mode of the auxiliary information display unit by the auxiliary display mode control unit in the display mode related to the command pattern, based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the command symbol is determined by the instruction symbol determination unit. The symbol is determined by the display instruction symbol determining means.
As a result, two or more instruction symbols are determined based on the determination result, so that the player can guess the determination result based on the type of instruction symbol displayed on the auxiliary information display means. Therefore, the display mode of the auxiliary information display means is displayed in the display mode related to the instruction symbol determined based on the determination result, and the player can predict a more detailed determination result. is there.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means, auxiliary information display means)
114 Display control device (part of display control means)
S306 discrimination means S2103 auxiliary display mode control means S2250 suggestion information display means

Claims (2)

Discrimination means for performing discrimination;
Display means for displaying identification information composed of a plurality of symbol strings for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and then stopping and displaying the identification information in a stop display mode for indicating the determination result by the determination means ;
In the gaming machine to which a privilege game is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode for indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result by the display control means,
The stop display mode for indicating that it is the specific determination result is such that the plurality of symbol strings are stopped and displayed in a combination of specific symbols,
The display control means is a reach display mode in which at least two or more symbol sequences of the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped or temporarily stopped by a combination of symbols that are a part of a combination for indicating the specific determination result. Configured to be displayed,
The gaming machine is
Auxiliary information that causes the display means to display auxiliary information related to the determination result separately from the identification information, between the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display control means and the time when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode. Display means;
Suggestion information display means for displaying a plurality of suggestion information for adding a suggestion mode capable of suggesting a determination result by the determination means to the auxiliary information displayed by the auxiliary information display means;
Auxiliary display mode control means for displaying a suggestion mode corresponding to one suggestion information in addition to the auxiliary information among the plurality of suggestion information displayed by the suggestion information display unit,
The plurality of suggestion information that can be displayed by the suggestion information display unit includes first suggestion information and second information that is more easily displayed in addition to the auxiliary information when the specific determination result is more than the first suggestion information. At least suggestion information is set,
The gaming machine, wherein the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information are configured in different display modes.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images